Toshiba PROSEC T1-16S PLC User's Manual - CTi Automation

6F3B0253 

UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031 

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 

PROSEC T1- 16S 

USER’S MANUAL 

− Basic Hardware and Function − 

TOSHIBA CORPORATION 

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: info@ctiautomation.net

Important Information 

Misuse of this equipment can result in property damage or human injury. 

Because controlled system applications vary widely, you should satisfy yourself 

as to the acceptability of this equipment for your intended purpose. 

In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for either indirect 

or consequential damage or injury that may result from the use of this equipment. 

No patent liability is assumed by Toshiba Corporation with respect to use of 

information, illustrations, circuits, equipment or examples of application in this 

publication. 

Toshiba Corporation reserves the right to make changes and improvements to this 

publication and/or related products at any time without notice. No obligation shall be 

incurred other than as noted in this publication. 

This publication is copyrighted and contains proprietary material. No part of this book 

may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any 

means ⎯ electrical, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise ⎯ without 

obtaining prior written permission from Toshiba Corporation. 

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2001. All rights reserved 

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. 

MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 

Publication number: UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031 

1st edition April 2001, 2nd edition November 2001 

6F3B0253 


CE Marking 

6F3B0253 

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) complies with the 

requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the 

condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual. 

The contents of the conformity are shown below. 

Application of EMC : 89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC) 

Council Directive LVD : 72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC) 

Manufacture’s Name : Toshiba Corporation, 

Fuchu Operations-Social Infrastructure Systems 

Address : 1, Toshiba-Cho 

Fuchu-shi 

TOKYO 183-8511 

Japan 

declares, that the product 

Product Name : Programmable Controller , T1-16S 

Model Number : TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C 

TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C 

conforms to the following Product Specifications: 

EMC 

Radiated Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A 

Mains Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A 

Radiated Susceptibility : ENV50140 

Conducted RFI Susceptibility : ENV50141, IEC100-4-6. 

Electrostatic Discharge : IEC1000-4-2 

Electrical Fast Transient : IEC1000-4-4 

LVD : EN61131-2:1995 3.10 Dielectric Properties 

4. Mechanical Requirements 

Supplementary information : 

(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S. 

(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration. 

(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions 

Basic Hardware and Function 1 


2 T1-16S User’s Manual 

UL/c-UL Listing 

6F3B0253 

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) is UL/c-UL listed as 

shown below. 

UL and c-UL Listing 

File Number : E95637 


Product Covered : Main Unit 

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C, 


I/O module 

TDI116M*S, TDD116M*S, TDO116M*S, 

TAD121M*S, TAD131M*S, TDA121M*S, TDA131M*S, 

TFR112M*S 

Peripherals 

TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S 

UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations 

File Number : E184034 


Product Covered : Main Unit 


Locations Class : Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D 

Important Notice : 1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, 

DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS 

LOCATIONS ONLY. 

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF 

COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, 

DIVISION 2. 

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT 

EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF 

OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS. 


Safety Precautions 

This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1-16S. 

Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1-16S. Also, keep this manual and related 

manuals so that you can read them anytime while the T1-16S is in operation. 

General Information 

6F3B0253 

1. The T1-16S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial 

environment. However, the T1-16S is not intended to be used for systems which may 

endanger human life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1-16S for a special 

application, such as transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space 

systems, nuclear controls, submarine systems, etc. 

2. The T1-16S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep 

safety of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside 

the T1-16S. 

3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1-16S, it is assumed that the 

users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems. 

If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to 

this product could result. 

4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable 

Controllers and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any 

questions about this manual. 

5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the 

operations and applications of the T1-16S. You should test completely if you use them 

as a part of your application system. 

Hazard Classifications 

In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety 

precautions. 

! WARNING 

! CAUTION 

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could 

result in death or serious injury. 

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may 

result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert 

against unsafe practices. 

Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on 

the situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual. 



Installation: 



1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas 

environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T1- 

16S and related equipment in the environment described in this manual. 

6F3B0253 

2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units 

to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions 

described in this manual. 

3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks, terminal 

blocks or battery. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1- 

16S and related equipment. 

4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related 

equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into 

the T1-16S and related equipment during installation and wiring. 

5. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or 

odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also 

unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair. 

Contact Toshiba for repairing. 

Wiring: 

! CAUTION 

! CAUTION 

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock. 

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style 

terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also 

close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been 

completed. 

3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the 

ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground. 

4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply 

power of the specified ratings described in the manual. 

5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local 

regulations on wiring and grounding. 


Operation: 


! WARNING 

1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1-16S. 

Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents. 

! CAUTION 

6F3B0253 

2. Operate the T1-16S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep 

hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. 

3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during 

operation, carefully check for safety. 

4. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so 

may cause unexpected behavior of the loads. 

5. Do not use any modules of the T1-16S for the purpose other than specified. This 

can cause electrical shock or injury. 

6. Do not modify the T1-16S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can 

cause fire, electrical shock or injury. 

7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for 

transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously. 

Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S. 

8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs. 

Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current. 

9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact 

can cause malfunction or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment. 



Maintenance: 



! CAUTION 

6F3B0253 

1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires. 

Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related 

equipment. 

2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance 

purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down. 

3. Touch a grounded metal part to discharge the static electricity on your body before 

touching the equipment. 

4. Otherwise, charged static electricity on your body can cause malfunction or failure. 

5. Do not disassemble the T1-16S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside. 

6. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in 

normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles. 

7. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating 

improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed. 

Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing. 

8. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the 

specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded. 

9. The battery used in T1-16S may present a risk of fire of chemical burn if mistreated. 

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100ºC (212ºF), or incinerate. 

10. Replace battery with CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire 

or explosion. 

11. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble 

and do not dispose of in fire. 


Safety Label 

The safety label as shown on the right is 

attached to the power terminal of the 

T1-16S. 

Remove the mount paper before wiring. 

Peel off the label from the mount paper 

and stick it near the power terminals 

where it can be readily seen. 


Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged. 

! 

CAUTION 

Do not touch terminals 

while power on. 

Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death. 

Do not touch terminals while power on. 

Read related manual thoroughly for safety. 

Stick this seal on unit or near unit. 

Take off this sheet before wiring. 

6F3B0253 



About This Manual 



6F3B0253 

This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller 

T1-16S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to 

enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment. 

This manual introduces the T1-16S, and explains the system configuration, 

specifications, installation and wiring for T1-16S’s basic hardware. This manual provides 

the information for designing T1-16S user program, such as the internal operation, 

memory configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for 

maintenance and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual. 

The T1-16S’s computer link function and T1-16S’s multi-purpose communication 

functions are covered by the separate manual. Read the T1-16S User’s Manual - 

Communication Function - for details. 

Inside This Manual 

This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix. 

Section 1 outlines the T1-16S configuration. To fully understand the T1-16S, it is 

important to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in 

designing external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with 

software. Section 8 explains the T1-16S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10 

describe the maintenance procedure for the T1-16S, to ensure safe operation and long 

service life. 

Related Manuals 

The following related manuals are available for T1-16S. Besides this manual, read the 

following manuals for your better understanding. 

T1-16S User’s Manual 

- Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual) UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031 

- I/O Modules - UM-TS01∗∗∗-E034 

- Communication Function - UM-TS01∗∗∗-E033 

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual UM-TS03∗∗∗-E025 

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual UM-TS03∗∗∗-E045 


Terminology 

The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual. 

6F3B0253 


µs microsecond 

ASCII American Standard Code For Information Interchange 

AWG American Wire Gage 

BCC Block Check Code 

CCW Counter-Clockwise 

CPU Central Processing Unit 

CW Clockwise 

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 

H hexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string) 

I/O Input/Output 

LED Light Emitting Diode 

LSB Least Significant Bit 

ms millisecond 

MSB Most Significant Bit 

PWM Pulse Width Modulation 

RAM Random Access Memory 

ROM Read Only Memory 

Vac AC voltage 

Vdc DC voltage 



Contents 

Contents 

Safety Precautions .................................................................................. 3 

About This Manual .................................................................................. 8 

1. System Configuration .................................................................... 13 

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S ................................................................ 14 

1.2 Features .............................................................................................. 16 

1.3 System configuration .......................................................................... 19 

1.4 I/O expansion ...................................................................................... 20 

1.5 Components ........................................................................................ 21 

1.5.1 Basic unit ......................................................................................... 21 

1.5.2 I/O modules ...................................................................................... 25 

1.5.3 Options ............................................................................................ 26 

1.6 Programmer port function .................................................................. 27 

1.7 RS-485 port communication function ................................................. 28 

1.8 Real-time data link system ................................................................. 32 

1.9 Peripheral tools .................................................................................. 33 

2. Specifications .................................................................................. 37 

2.1 General specifications ........................................................................ 38 

2.2 Functional specifications .................................................................... 40 

2.3 I/O specifications ................................................................................ 42 

2.4 External dimensions ........................................................................... 46 

3. I/O Application Precautions .......................................................... 47 

3.1 Application precautions for input signals ............................................ 48 

3.2 Application precautions for output signals .......................................... 50 

4. Installation and Wiring ................................................................... 53 

4.1 Environmental conditions ................................................................... 54 

4.2 Installing the unit ................................................................................. 55 

4.3 Wiring terminals .................................................................................. 57 

4.4 Grounding ........................................................................................... 58 

4.5 Power supply wiring ............................................................................ 59 

4.6 I/O wiring ............................................................................................ 61 


6F3B0253 


6F3B0253 

Contents 

5. Operating System Overview ......................................................... 63 

5.1 Operation modes ................................................................................ 64 

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................ 66 

5.3 Scanning ............................................................................................. 69 

6. Programming Information ............................................................. 73 

6.1 Devices and registers ......................................................................... 74 

6.2 Index modification ............................................................................... 86 

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar .................................................................... 88 

6.4 I/O allocation ....................................................................................... 89 

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting.............................................................. 91 

6.6 User program configuration ................................................................ 92 

6.6.1 Main program .................................................................................. 94 

6.6.2 Sub-program #1 .............................................................................. 95 

6.6.3 Timer interrupt program .................................................................. 95 

6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs ..................................................................... 96 

6.6.5 Subroutines .................................................................................... 97 

6.7 Programming language ...................................................................... 98 

6.8 Program execution sequence ............................................................ 99 

6.9 On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 100 

6.10 Password protection ........................................................................... 103 

7. Instructions ...................................................................................... 105 

7.1 List of instructions .............................................................................. 106 

7.2 Instruction specifications .................................................................... 116 

8. Special I/O Functions .................................................................... 255 

8.1 Special I/O function overview ............................................................. 256 

8.2 Variable input filter constant .............................................................. 260 

8.3 High speed counter ............................................................................ 261 

8.3.1 Single phase up-counter ................................................................. 262 

8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter ............................................................ 263 

8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................ 265 

8.4 Interrupt input function ........................................................................ 268 

8.5 Analog setting function ....................................................................... 270 

8.6 Pulse output function .......................................................................... 271 

8.7 PWM output function .......................................................................... 273 

9. Maintenance and Checks .............................................................. 275 

9.1 Precautions during operation ............................................................. 276 

9.2 Daily checks ........................................................................................ 277 

9.3 Periodic checks ................................................................................... 278 

9.4 Maintenance parts ............................................................................... 279 

9.5 Battery ................................................................................................. 280 



Contents 

10. Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 281 

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................ 282 

10.1.1 Power supply check ......................................................................... 283 

10.1.2 CPU check ....................................................................................... 284 

10.1.3 Program check ................................................................................. 284 

10.1.4 Input check ....................................................................................... 285 

10.1.5 Output check .................................................................................... 286 

10.1.6 Environmental problem .................................................................... 287 

10.2 Self-diagnostic items .......................................................................... 288 

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 293 

A.1 List of models and types ..................................................................... 294 

A.2 Instruction index ................................................................................. 295 


6F3B0253 


Section 1 

System Configuration 

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S, 14 

1.2 Features, 16 

1.3 System configuration, 19 

1.4 I/O expansion, 20 

1.5 Components, 21 

1.6 Computer link system, 27 

1.7 T1-16S Communication function, 28 

1.8 Real-time data link system, 32 

1.9 Peripheral tools, 33 

6F3B0253 



1. System Configuration 

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16 is compact, block style, high-performance programmable controller with a 

range of 16 to 144 input and output points. 

The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 16 

types. 

T1 Series T1 T1-16 T1-MDR16 

T1-MAR16 

T1-MDR16D 

T1-28 T1-MDR28 



T1-40 T1-MDR40 



T1S T1-16S T1-MDR16SS 

T1-MDR16SC 

T1-MDR16SSD 

T1-MDR16SCD 

T1-40S T1-MDR40S 

T1-MAR40S 

T1-MDR40SD 

I/O points: 

The T1 Series are available in five models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40, T1-40S and T1- 

16S. Each model has the following I/O points. 

T1-16 T1-16S T1-28 T1-40 T1-40S 

Input 8 points 14 points 24 points 

Output 8 points 

(6 relay plus 2 slid-state) 

Expansion No Up to 8 I/O 

modules. 

Total up to 

144 points. 

14 points 

(12 relay plus 

2 slid-state) 

16 points 

(14 relay plus 2 solid-state) 

No 2 option cards plus 

1 expansion rack or unit. 

Total up to 382 points. 

The T1-16S can expand its I/O points by connecting I/O modules. Up to eight I/O 

modules can be connected. If eight 16-point I/O modules are connected to the T1- 

16S, it can control up to 144 points. 


6F3B0253 


Memory capacity: 

Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps. 

Whole the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM. 

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S T1-16S 

Memory RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up) 

Program 2 k steps 8 k steps 

capacity 

(4 k mode or 8 k mode) 

Data capacity Auxiliary relay: 1024 points Auxiliary relay: 4096 points 

Timer: 64 points Timer: 256 points 

Counter: 64 points Counter: 256 points 

Data register: 1024 words Data register: 4096 words 

EEPROM Program and leading 512 Program and the user specified range of 

back-up words of Data register Data register (0 to 2048 words) 

RAM back-up Capacitor: 6 hours or more Capacitor: 168 hours Capacitor: 1 hour 

(at 25°C) 

or more 

or more 

(at 77°F) 

Battery: 2 years 

or more 

Control functions: 

In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as 

data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its highspeed 

counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions 

allow its application to a wide scope of control systems. 

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S T1-16S 

Language Ladder diagram with function block 

Number of Basic: 17 types Basic: 21 types Basic: 21 types 

instructions Function: 76 types Function: 99 types Function: 97 types 

Subroutines 16 

256 

(nesting not allowed) (up to 3 levels of nesting) 

Execution speed 1.4 µs/contact, 2.3 µs/coil, 4.2 µs/transfer, 6.5 µs/addition 

Real-time No Yes (year, month, day, week, hours, 

clock/calendar 

minutes, seconds) 

Communication RS-232C 

RS-232C (programmer port), 

(programmer port) RS-485 (multi-purpose) 

Construction: 

The T1-16S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The 

T1-16S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-16S has 

modular expandability. The T1-16S provides flexibility into the block style controller. 

Series compatibility: 

Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable 

controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2, 

T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared. 




1.2 Features 


6F3B0253 

I/O module support: 

The T1-16S has an interface for connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight modules 

can be connected to the T1-16S. 

By using the 16 points I/O module, the T1-16S can control up to 144 I/O points. 

Built-in high-speed counter: 

Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The 

acceptable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only) 

Built-in analog setting adjusters: 

Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. This allows operators to 

adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver. 

High speed processing: 

Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations. 

The T1-16S is designed to meet these requirements. 

• 1.4 µs per contact • 2.3 µs per coil 

• 4.2 µs per 16-bit transfer • 6.5 µs per 16-bit addition 

The T1-16S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows 

immediate operation independent of program scan. 

High performance software: 

The T1-16S offers 21 basic ladder instructions and 97 function instructions. 

Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative 

real PID, etc. are standard on the T1-16S. These functions allow the T1-16S to be 

applied to the most demanding control applications. 

Battery-less operation: 

The T1-16S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a 

battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM, 

providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation. 

This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for 

changing the battery every few years. 

(Optional battery is also available to back-up real-time clock and retentive data) 


6F3B0253 


Pulse output / PWM output: 

One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be 

output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an 

analog output. (DC input type only) 

Built-in computer link function: 

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data 

read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator 

interface unit, etc. 

The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The 

none parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using 

modems, remote programming/monitoring is available. 

Real-time control data link network: 

By connecting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M) to the T1 -16S, highspeed 

data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC 

model (T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-16Ss can be 

connected as remote. Each T1-16S can exchange data with the master through 1 

word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750 

kbps or 250 kbps. 

Sampling trace function: 

The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user 

specified timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the 

programmer screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful 

for checking the input signals changing. 

Password protection: 

By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the 

security levels required for your application. 

Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited 

Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited 

Level 2: Writing program is prohibited 

Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level) 

Two points of solid-state output: 

Each model of the T1-16S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC 

input type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for 

frequent switching application. 





6F3B0253 

DIN rail mounting: 

The T1-16S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail. 

The T1-16S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting. 

On-line program changes: 

When the T1-16S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode) 

program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in 

EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program 

debugging stage. 

Real-time clock/calendar function: (Enhanced model only) 

The T1-16S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the 

week, hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled 

operations, data gathering with time stamps, etc. To back-up the real-time 

clock/calendar data, use of the optional battery is recommended. 

RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (Enhanced model only) 

The T1-16S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one 

of the following communication modes can be selected. 

• Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. 

Up to 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode, 

MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured. 

• Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be 

directly linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and 

requires no special programming. 

• Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and 

received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial 

ASCII device can be directly connected. 

• Inverter connection mode: This mode is specially provided to communicate with 

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 series. By using this function, the T1-16S 

can control and monitor the connected Inverters. 


1.3 System configuration 

The following figure shows the T1-16S system configuration. 

Peripheral tool 

IBM-PC compatible 

personal computer 

T-PDS 

software 

Handy programmer 

HP911A 

Computer link function 

MMI/SCADA 

system 

RS232C 

MMI/SCADA 

system 

T1-16S basic unit 

T1-16S 

I/O modules 

6F3B0253 


IBM-PC compatible 

personal computer 

RS485 (Standard type only) 

8 modules max. 

Inverter 




1.4 I/O expansion 

NOTE 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16S provides I/O expandability by connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight 

I/O modules can be connected. 

Available I/O modules 

DI116M: 16 points DC input 

DO116M: 16 points DC output 

DD116M: 8 points DC input + 8 points DC output 

RO108M: 8 points relay output 

AD121M: 1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA) 

AD131M: 1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V) 

DA121M: 1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA) 

DA131M: 1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V) 

TC111M: 1 channel thermocouple input (type K, J, E, or ±50mV) 

FR112M: TOSLINE-F10 remote station 

T1-16S maximum configuration 


main unit 

Up to 8 I/O modules 

(1) The 5Vdc power to the I/O modules is supplied from the main unit. The main 

unit can supply maximum 1.5A of the 5Vdc power to the I/O modules. Check 

the current consumption of each I/O module used. Refer to section 2.1. 

(2) The connecting order of the I/O modules is not restricted except TOSLINE- 

F10 remote station FR112M. When the FR112M is used, it must be the right 

end module. 

(3) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, the T1-16S cannot operate 

normally. 


1.5 Components 

1.5.1 Basic unit 

The T1-16S is available in four types as shown in the following table. 

6F3B0253 


Type Link/ Calendar Power supply Input Output 

T1-MDR16SS 

(Enhanced model) 

Yes 

100-240 Vac, 

50/60 Hz 

8 points - 24 Vdc 6 points - relay, 

2 points - transistor 

T1-MDR16SC 

(Standard model) 

No 

T1-MDR16SSD 

(Enhanced model) 

Yes 

24 Vdc 

T1-MDR16SCD 

(Standard model) 

No 

Link terminals 

(Enhanced model only) 

Programmer 

port cover 

Battery holder 

cover 

Power supply and 

input/output terminals 

Operation status LEDs 

I/O status LEDs (Low side) 

Mounting hole 

Expantion 

connector 

I/O status LEDs (High side) 




♦ Behind the programmer port cover 


PRG 

Programmer port connector 

V0 

V1 

H/R 

Analog setting adjusters 

(V0 and V1) 

Mode control switch 

(HALT / RUN) 

Battery holder 

Battery type: CR2032 

(Optional) 

A tab for battery eject 

Power supply terminals: 

Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3. 

See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring. 

Input terminals: 

Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for 

details. 

Output terminals: 

Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for 

details. 

6F3B0253 


I/O status LEDs: 

Indicates the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal. (color: red) 

SW54 setting 

value 

I/O intending for an indication Note 

0 (default) Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027) 

1 I/O module slot 0 








9 TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), Low 1 word 

10 TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), High 1 word 

Others Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027) 

Operation status LEDs: 

Indicates the operation status of the T1-16S. 

FLT 

RUN 

PWR 

6F3B0253 


It indicates these at the 

time of only RUN 

mode. 

PWR 

Lit Internal 5 Vdc power is normal. 

(Power) (green) Not lit Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal. 

RUN (green) Lit RUN mode (in operation) 

Blinking HOLD mode 

Not lit HALT mode or ERROR mode 

FLT 

Lit ERROR mode 

(Fault) (red) Blinking Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected) 

Not lit Normal 

Mode control switch: 

Controls the operation modes of the T1-16S. 

H (HALT) When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1-16S stops 

program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT 

command from the programmer is disabled. 

R (RUN) When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1-16S starts 

program execution. This is the position during normal operation. 

In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also 

available. 





6F3B0253 

Analog setting adjusters: 

Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the 

V1 value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section 

8.5 for details of the analog setting function. 

Programmer port connector: 

Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also 

be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information 

about the computer link function. 

Expansion connector: 

Used to connect the I/O module. 

RS-485 port (Enhanced model only): 

Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1-16S, 

or many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485 

interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1-16S’s RS-485 multipurpose 

communication functions. 

Mounting holes: 

Used to fix the T1-16S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are 

provided at two opposite corners. 

T1 

Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for 

installing the unit. 

DIN rail bracket: 

The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1-16S on a 35 mm DIN 

rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit. 


1.5.2 I/O modules 

NOTE 

6F3B0253 


The T1-16S can connect up to eight I/O modules. 

The following 10 types of the I/O modules are available. 

For specification details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S 

User’s Manual − I/O Modules −“. 

Type Description Power supply 

DI116M 16 points input, 24Vdc – 5mA 

DO116M 16 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA 

DD116M 8 points input, 24Vdc - 5mA 

+ 8 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA 

RO108M 8 points relay output, 24Vdc/240Vac - 1A 

AD121M 1 channel analog input, 0 to 5V / 0 to 20mA 

AD131M 1 channel analog input, ±10V 

DA121M 1 channel analog output, 0 to 20mA 

DA131M 1 channel analog output, ±10V 

TC111M 1 channel thermo-couple input 

FR112M TOSLINE-F10 remote station, 

1 word input + 1 word output 

FR112M Other I/O modules 

Expantion connector Expantion connectors 

Supplied from the 

basic unit (5 Vdc) 

(1) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, T1-16S cannot operate normally. 

(2) The TOSLINE-F10 remote station module (FR112M) must be connected at the 

right end. Tow or more FR112Ms cannot be used together. 




1.5.3 Options 

The following optional items are available. 


6F3B0253 

Item Type Description 

Cable for 

programming tool 

CJ105 For T-PDS, 5 m length 

Programmer port 

connector 

PT16S For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable 

Option card I/O PT15S Cable side connector for Soldering type 

connector PT15F DI116M, DO116M, or DD116M Flat cable type 

Back-up battery CR2032 For memory back up. (Available on the market.) 


1.6 Programmer port function 

6F3B0253 


The interface of the T1-16S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is 

used to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the 

computer link function. 

The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator 

interface unit and the T1-16S. The data in the T1-16S can be read and written by 

creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol 

of the T1-16S is published in “T1-16S User’s Manual − Communication Function −”. 

Item Specifications 

Interface Conforms to RS-232C 

Transmission system Half-duplex 

Synchronization Start-stop system (asynchronous) 

Transmission speed 9600 bps (fixed) 

Transmission distance 15 m max. 

Framing Start bit: 

Data bits: 

Parity: 

Stop bit: 

1 bit 

8 bits (fixed) 

Odd or none 

1 bit (fixed) 

Protocol T-series computer link (ASCII) 

Programmer (binary) 

Transmission delay option 0 to 300 ms 

By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1-16Ss can be connected on an 

RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in 

this configuration. 

Operator Interface 


C 

U 

Master Computer 

RS-232C RS-485 (1 km max.) 


C 

U 


C 

U 

Max. 32 T1-16Ss 





1.7 RS-485 port communication function 

NOTE 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16S enhanced model has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. 

This port can work independent of the programmer port. 

By using this communication port, one of the following four communication modes is 

available, computer link mode, data link mode, free ASCII mode, and Inverter 

connection mode. 

For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual − 

Communication Function −”. 

Item Computer 

link 

Free ASCII Inverter 

connection 

Data link 

Interface Conforms to RS-458 

Transmission system Half-duplex 

Synchronization Start-stop system (asynchronous) 

Transmission code ASCII/binary ASCII Binary Binary 

Transmission speed 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 

19200 bps 

19200 bps 

(fixed) 

Transmission 

distance 

1 km max. 

Framing Start bit: 1 bit 

Special 

Data bits: 7 or 8 bits 

Parity: Odd, even, or none 

Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits 

Protocol T-series 

computer 

User 

defined 

Inverter VF- 

A7/G7/S9 

Special 

link (ASCII), ASCII binary 

Programmer 

(binary) 

messages protocol 

Link configuration 1-to-N N/A 1-to-N 1-to-1 

T1-16S standard model does not have the RS-485 interface. 


6F3B0253 


Computer link mode 

T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1-16Ss 

can be connected to a master computer. 

By using this mode, all the T1-16S’s data can be accessed by a master computer. 

The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this 

configuration. 


Master Computer 

RS-485 (1 km max.) 

T1-16S T1-16S 

Max. 32 T1-16Ss 


Data link mode 

Two PLCs (any combination of T1-16S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together. 

This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special 

programming. Data registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer. 


Station No. 1 

D0000 

D0015 

D0016 

D0031 

RS-485 (1 km max.) 

T1S 

Station No. 2 

D0000 

D0015 

D0016 

D0031 


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: info@ctiautomation.net 

T1



6F3B0253 

Free ASCII mode 

The free ASCII mode is used to connect between the T1-16S and various serial 

ASCII devices, such as a micro computer, bar code reader, printer, display, etc. 

By using this mode, the T1-16S can work as a communication master. Therefore, the 

T1-16S can communicate with other PLCs using the computer link protocol. 


RS-485 (1 km max.) 

• Bar-code reader 

• ID system 

• Weigh scale 

• Power meter 

• Printer 

• Others 


6F3B0253 


Free ASCII mode 

The T1-16S's Inverter connection mode is a special function to monitor/control the 

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 through the RS-485 line. 

Using this mode, the T1-16S can perform the following functions for the Inverters 

connected on the RS-485 line without any special communication program. 

• Monitoring − Operating frequency and Terminal status 

• Control − Run/Stop/Jog, Forward/Reverse, Frequency reference, etc. 

• Parameter read/write 

• Broadcast command 

888 

VF-A7 VF-A7 VF-S9 

888 


RS-485 (1 km max.) 

888 888 

RS485 adapter 

VF-S9 

888 888 

VF-S9 VF-S9 

(Max. 64 Inverters) 




1.8 Real-time data link system 

TOSLINE-F10 


6F3B0253 

TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O 

distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M), the 

T1-16S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10 network. On this network, 

the T1-16S sends 1 word data to the master station and receives 1 word data from 

the master station. 

Item TOSLINE-F10 system specifications 

High speed mode Long distance mode 

Topology Bus (terminated at both ends) 

Transmission distance 

(without repeater) 

500 m max. (total) 1 km max. (total) 

Transmission speed 750 kbps 250 kbps 

Scan transmission 512 points (32 words) max. 

capacity 

Scan cycle 7 ms/32 words 12 ms/32 words 

Error checking CRC check 

NOTE 

Typical data link configuration 

The figure below shows the typical data link configuration. 


(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual − Option Card and I/O 

Module −“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112). 

(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of 

overall TOSLINE-F10 system. 

TOSLINE-F10 

T1-16S T1-16S 

Operator interface units 

Master 

computer 

T2E 

(master) 

T2E 

(remote) 

RI/O 

RI/O 

RI/O: remote I/O 


1.9 Peripheral tools 

The following peripheral tools are available for the T1-16S. 

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) 

6F3B0253 


The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on 

any IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers. 

The same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and 

program documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S, 

T2/T2E/T2N, T3/T3H and S2T. 

• User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace, 

program block move/copy, etc. 

• Group programming − part program development by multiple designers and 

merging them into a complete program − enhance the software productivity. 

• Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program 

debugging. 

• Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work 

easy. 

• Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible. 

The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1-16S. 

Type Part number Versions available for 

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S/T1-16S 

T-PDS for Windows TMW33E1SS Ver 1.0 or later *1) 

Ver 1.2 or later 

T-PDS for MS-DOS TMM33I1SS Ver 1.61 or later *1) 


*1) The T1-16S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are 

the following functional limitations. 

• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the 

T1-16S. 

• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be 

edited/monitored. (depending on the version) 

NOTE 

The connection cable for the T1-16S is different from that for upper T-Series 

PLCs. These cables are supplied separately. 

Connection cable for T1-16S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length 

Connection cable for T2/T3 …. Type: CJ905, 5 m length 




T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A) 


6F3B0253 

The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1-16S 

using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote 

locations. 

The HP911A has the following features. 

• The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable 

controllers T1-16S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3. 

• Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers. 

• Two display modes are available, 

- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns 

- Zoom: Full device description 

• On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking. 

• Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light. 

There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable 

included with. 

Type Part number Cable included with Versions available for T1-16S 

HP911A THP911A∗S 2 m cable for T1-16S Ver 1.1 or later 

HP911 THP911∗∗S 2 m cable for the upper 

T-series PLCs 


The T1-16S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following 

functional limitations. 

• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1- 

16S. 

• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be 

edited/monitored. 

NOTE 

A 2 m connection cable for the T1-16S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the 

HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m 

length) 


Program Storage Module (RM102) 

Multi-drop adapter (CU111) 

6F3B0253 


The program storage module (RM102) is an 

external memory for storing the T1-16S 

program. By using the RM102, program saving 

from the T1-16S to the RM102, and program 

loading from the RM102 to the T1-16S can be 

done without need of a programmer. 

Because the RM102 has an EEPROM, 

maintenance-free program storage and quick 

saving/loading are available. 

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port 

supports the computer link function. 

When two or more T1-16Ss are connected with 

a master computer, the multi-drop adapter 

(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration) 

The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter 

specially designed for the T1-16S’s 

programmer port. 




6F3B0253 


Section 2 

Specifications 

2.1 General specifications, 38 

2.2 Functional specifications, 40 

2.3 I/O specifications, 42 

2.4 External dimensions, 46 

6F3B0253 



2. Specifications 

2.1 General specifications 

NOTE 

AC Power type 

DC Power type 


Item T1-16S 

Power supply voltage 100 to 240Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 45VA or less 

Inrush current 50A or less (at 240Vac, cold start) 

Output 24Vdc 

0.2A (for external devices and/or for input signals) 

rating (24Vdc, ±10%) 

(Note) 5Vdc 1.5A (for I/O module) 

Power supply voltage 24Vdc (+20/-15%) 

Power consumption 18W or less 

Inrush current 25A or less (at 24Vdc) 

5Vdc output rating (Note) 1.5A (for I/O module) 

Retentive power interruption 10ms or less 

Insulation resistance 10MΩ or more 

(between power terminals and ground terminal) 

Withstand voltage 1500Vac - 1 minute 

Ambient temperature 0 to 55°C (operation), -20 to 75°C (storage) 

Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH, no condensation 

Noise immunity 1000Vp-p/1µs, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 

Vibration immunity 9.8m/s 2 (1g) 

(for 30 minutes per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes) 

Shock immunity 98m/s 2 (10g) 

(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes) 

Approximate weight 500g 

6F3B0253 

(1) 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type. 

(2) The maximum output current of the 5Vdc is 1.5A. However there is the following 

restrictions, depending on the conditions. 

• When HP911 is used: 

→ Redused by 0.2A 

• When RS-485 port is used: 

→ Reduced by 0.1A 

• When 24Vdc service power is used: 

→ Refer to the right chart. 

5Vdc 

maximum load current 

(A) 

1.5 

1.0 

0.1 0.2 (A) 

24Vdc service power 


NOTE 

(3) The 5Vdc current consumption of each I/O modules is described below. 

Check that the total 5Vdc current consumption is within the limit. 

6F3B0253 


Model Specifications 5Vdc consumer 

current 

DI116M 16points, 24Vdc-5mA input. 50mA 

DO116M 16points, 24Vdc-100mA output. 50mA 

DD116M 8points, 24Vdc-5mA input. 

8points, 24Vdc-100mA output. 

50mA 

RO108M 8 points, 24Vdc/240Vac – 1A relay output 260mA 

AD121M 1ch. 12bit analog input. 

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V) 

260mA 

AD131M 1ch. 12bit analog input. (±10V) 260mA 

DA121M 1ch. 12bit analog output. 

350mA 

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V) 

DA131M 1ch. 12bit analog output. (±10V) 240mA 

TC111M 1ch. 12bit thermo couple input. 400mA 

FR112M TOSLINE-F10 remote station. 100mA 




2.2 Functional specifications 


Control method Stored program, cyclic scan system 

Scan system Floating scan or constant scan (10 – 200ms, 10ms units) 

I/O update Batch I/O refresh 

(direct I/O instruction available at basic unit’s I/O) 

Program memory (Note) RAM and EEPROM (no back-up battery required) 

Program capacity 8K steps 

(4K or 8K mode) 

Programming language Ladder diagram with function block 

Instructions Basic: 21 

Function: 97 

Execution speed 1.4µs/contact, 2.3µs/coil, 

4.2µs/16-bit transfer, 6.5µs/16-bit addition 

Program types 

1 main program 

1 sub-program (initial program) 

1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000ms, 5ms units) 

User data 

Memory 


4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input) 

I/O register 

256 subroutines (up to 3 levels of nesting) 

512 points/ 32 words (X/XW, Y/YW) 

Auxiliary relay 4096 points/ 256 words (R/RW) 

Special relay 1024 points/ 64 words (S/SW) 

Timer 256 points (T./T) 

64 at 0.01s, 192 at 0.1s 

Counter 256 points (C./C) 

Data register 4096 words (D) 

Index register 3 words (I, J, K) 

Capacitor 1 hour (at 25°C) 

back-up Battery (option) Max. 2 years. 

Min. 6 months. (Note) 

NOTE 

6F3B0253 

(1) The user program stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM 

when power is turned on. Therefore, if the program is modified, it is 

necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming 

tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-written by original 

EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing. 

(2) The data of RAM and calendar IC are backed up by built-in capacitor 

and optional battery. 

(3) When the optional battery is used, replace the battery periodically with 

referring to the table below. 

Annual average air temperature 

Under 30°C (86°F) Over 30°C (86°F) 

Operation Over 8 hours 2 years 1 year 

time per day Under 8 hours 1 year 6 months 


Functional specifications (cont’d) 


I/O capacity 16 points (basic) 

+128 points (I/O modules) 

I/O type Input 24Vdc input (8 points) 

Output Relay (6 points) + transistor (2 points) 

I/O terminal block Fixed 

Real-time clock Yes, ±60 s/month at 25°C 

/calendar 


Special I/O functions 

(Note) 

Communications 

interface 

Debug support 

function 

NOTE 

• High speed counter, 2 single or 1 quadrature 

• Interrupt input, 2 points 

• Adjustable analog register, 2 points 

• Pulse output, CW+CCW or pulse+direction 

• PWM output 

• 1 port RS-232C (programmer port) 

- for Programmer or Computer link connection 

• 1 port RS-485 (Enhanced model only) 

- Programmer 

- Computer link 

- Data link 

- Free ASCII 

• TOSLINE-F10 remote (by I/O module) 

• Sampling trace, 8 devices and 3 register - 256 times 

• On-line programming 

• On-line EEPROM write 

6F3B0253 


(1) High-speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are 

available in the DC input types. 

(2) High-speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously. 

(3) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously. 




2.3 I/O specifications 

• Input specifications 

Item Specifications 

Input type DC input, current source/sink 

Number of input points 8 points (8 points/common) 

Rated input voltage 24Vdc, +10/-15 % 

Rated input current 7mA (at 24Vdc) 

Min. ON voltage 15Vdc 

Max. OFF voltage 5Vdc 

ON delay time 0 to 15ms *1 

OFF delay time 0 to 15ms *1 

Input signal display LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic 

side 

External connection Removable terminal block, M3 

Withstand voltage 1500Vac, 1 minute 

(between internal and external circuits) 

Internal circuit 

LED 


0 

7 

C 

*1: User can change the input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input. 

The setting range is 0 to 15ms. (Default value = 10ms) Refer to section 8.2. 


6F3B0253 


• Input signal connections 

L 

Service power 

24Vdc 

NOTE 


24Vdc 

− 

C 

1 

DC IN 

3 

5 

Vin 

21 

23 

N NC + 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C 

24Vdc input 

7 

25 

27 

6F3B0253 


The 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type. 




• Output specifications 

Item 

Specifications 

Relay output Transistor output 

Output type Relay contact, normally open Transistor output, current sink 

Number of output points 6 points 

2 points 

(6 pts/common) 

(2 points/common) 

Rated load voltage 240Vac/24Vdc (max.) 24Vdc 

Range of load voltage Max. 264Vac/125Vdc 20.0 - 28.0Vdc 

Maximum load current 2A/point (resistive), 

4A/common 

0.5A/point (resistive) 

ON resistance 50mΩ or less 

(initial value) 

− 

Voltage drop at ON − 0.5V or less 

Leakage current at OFF None 0.1mA or less 

Minimum load 5Vdc, 10mA 

(50mW) 

− 

ON delay time 10ms or less 0.1ms or less 

OFF delay time 10ms or less 0.1ms or less 

Input signal display LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side 

External connection Removable terminal block, M3 

Withstand voltage 


1500Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits) 


LED 


Ry 

22 

27 

C 

LED 

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows. 

20 million times or more (mechanical) 

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current) 


Vin 

20 

21 

C 

6F3B0253 


• Output signal connections 

L 

Service power 

24Vdc 


N 

NC 

− 

C 

1 

3 

5 

24Vdc 

7 

DC OUT 

Vin 

21 

23 

+ 0 2 4 6 20 22 24 26 

+ 

RELAY OUT 

25 

27 

C C 

Transister output Relay output 

PS 

6F3B0253 


PS 240Vac/24Vdc (max.) 




2.4 External dimensions 

♦ T1-16S 

♦ I/O module 


6F3B0253 


[mm] 

[mm]

Section 3 

I/O Application Precautions 

3.1 Application precautions for input signals, 48 

3.2 Application precautions for output signals, 50 

6F3B0253 



3. I/O Application Precautions 

3.1 Application precautions for input signals 

! WARNING 


6F3B0253 

(1) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal 

The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input 

signal: 

Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan 

Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan 

The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals. 

(2) Increasing the contact current 

The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In 

this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current. 

V 

I 

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the 

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious 

accidents. 

R 

I 2 

Bleeder resistor 

I 1 


input 

circuit 

V 

R 

I I 

Wattage V 

= 

− 1 

2 

> × 3 

R 

(3) Connecting transistor output device 

An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1-16S’s input circuit is shown 

below. 

• For NPN open collector • For PNP open collector 

C 


input 

circuit 

C 


input 

circuit 


6F3B0253 


(4) Countermeasures against leakage current 

When a switch with an LED or sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot recognize 

that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder resistor 

to reduce input impedance. 

LE 

Bleeder resistor 

C 


input 

circuit 

Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria: 

(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage 

when the sensor is switched off. 

(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on. 

(c) Calculate the wattage of the bleeder resistor by multiplying the current when the 

sensor is switched on times three. 




3.2 Application precautions for output signals 

! WARNING 

! CAUTION 


6F3B0253 

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the 

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious 

accidents 

1. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. 

Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads. 

2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24Vdc power required 

for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched 

on/off simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off 

power to the T1-16S. 

3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the 

outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current. 

(1) 2 points of solid-state output 

The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on 

the DC input types. 

These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications. 

Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are 

different. 

(2) Switching life of output relays 

Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage 

and current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life 

(electrical cycles) is shown on the table below. 

Load Load Expected life 

Load Load Expected life 

voltage current (thousand) 

voltage current (thousand) 

AC 110Vac, 2A 340 DC 24Vdc, 2A 280 

load COSφ = 1 1A 720 load L/R = 0 ms 1A 600 

0.5A 1,600 0.5A 1,300 

110Vac, 2A 150 24Vdc, 2A 60 

COSφ = 0.7 1A 320 L/R = 15 ms 1A 150 

0.5A 700 0.5A 350 

220Vac, 2A 220 48Vdc, 1A 200 

COSφ = 1 1A 500 L/R = 0 ms 0.5A 420 

0.5A 1,100 48Vdc, 0.5A 130 

220Vac, 2A 100 L/R = 15 ms 0.2A 420 

COSφ = 0.7 1A 210 110Vdc, 0.5A 200 

0.5A 460 L/R = 0 ms 0.2A 550 

110Vdc, 0.2A 150 

L/R = 15 ms 0.1A 350 


6F3B0253 


(3) Over-current protection 

The output circuit of the T1-16S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the 

output should be provided by the user. 


output 

(4) Output surge protection 

Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient 

voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused 

by this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load. 


output 

circuit 

Surge absorber: 

• Flywheel diode (for DC output) 

Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply 

Forward current: Larger than the load current 

• Varistor (for AC output) 

The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply 

• CR snubber (for DC or AC output) 

Load 

Load 

Fuse appropriate to 

the common current 

Load 

Surge absorber 

R: 0.5 to 1Ω per volt coil voltage 

C: 0.5 to 1µF per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor) 

PS 

PS 




6F3B0253 


Section 4 

Installation and Wiring 

4.1 Environmental conditions, 54 

4.2 Installing the unit, 55 

4.3 Wiring terminals, 57 

4.4 Grounding, 58 

4.5 Power supply wiring, 59 

4.6 I/O wiring, 61 

6F3B0253 



4. Installation and Wiring 

4.1 Environmental conditions 

! CAUTION 

Do not install the T1-16S in the following locations: 

• Where the ambient temperature drops below 0°C or exceeds 55°C. 

• Where the relative humidity drops below 20% or exceeds 90%. 

• Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes. 

• In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance. 

• In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance. 

• Where there are corrosive or flammable gases. 

• In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles. 

• In locations exposed to direct sunlight. 


Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive 

gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. 

Install and use the T1-16S and related equipment in the environment 

described in this section. 

6F3B0253 

Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1-16S will 

be installed: 

• Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels. 

This distance must be at least 200mm. 

• If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to 

correctly ground the enclosures. 

• When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from 

the other panels or equipment. 


4.2 Installing the unit 

! CAUTION 

NOTE 

6F3B0253 


The T1-16S basic unit and the I/O module come equipped with a bracket at the rear 

for mounting on a 35mm DIN rail. 

Installation precautions: 

• Because the T1-16S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure. 

• Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of 

heat, such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor. 

• Do not install the unit within 200mm of high-voltage or high-power cables. 

• Allow at least 70mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation. 

• For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from 

high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a 

metal plate or similar separator. 

• If high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1-16S, 

special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4. 

• Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals downside. Do 

not install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason. 

• Use M4 size screws to mount the T1-16S. 

(Recommended torque: 1.47N⋅m = 15Kgf⋅cm) 

Upward 

1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause 

fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in 

accordance with the instructions described in this section. 

2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, 

racks or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock 

or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment. 

3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and 

related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to 

prevent entering them into the T1 and related equipment during 

installation and wiring. 

Mount the T1-16S on a vertical panel. 

All other mounting positions are not 

acceptable. 




Dimensions for screw mounting: 


6F3B0253 


4.3 Wiring terminals 

! CAUTION 

6F3B0253 


The terminal screw size of the T1-16S is M3. Use crimp-style terminals of 7mm width 

or less useable for M3. The terminal block is not removable (fixed). 

NOTE 

For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3. 

T1-MDR16SS .... AC power supply model T1-MDR16SSD.. DC power supply model 

RS-485 (Enhanced model only) 

TXA RXA RXB 

TXB TRM SG 

MDR16SS 

DC IN 

DC OUT 

RELAY OUT 

L − C 1 3 5 7 Vin 21 23 25 27 

N NC + 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C 

NOTE 


2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use 

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover 

the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the 

terminal blocks when wiring has been completed. 

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal 

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage 

to the T1-16S and related equipment. 

RS-485 (Enhanced model only) 

TXA RXA RXB 

TXB TRM SG 

MDR16SSD 

+ 

- 

DC IN 

DC OUT 

RELAY OUT 

NC C 1 3 5 7 Vin 21 23 25 27 

NC NC 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C 

(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire 

relaying or branching. 

(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (the upper 

terminal block), refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual - 

Communication Function -. 

The applicable wire size is 0.3mm 2 (22 AWG) to 1.25mm 2 (16 AWG). The table below 

shows the recommended wire size. 

Type of signal Recommended wire size 

Power 1.25mm 2 (16 AWG) 

Grounding 1.25mm 2 (16 AWG) 

I/O signals 0.3mm 2 (22 AWG) to 0.75mm 2 (18 AWG) 




4.4 Grounding 

! CAUTION 



6F3B0253 

2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. 

Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground. 

The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately 

from other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic 

equipment with a single-point ground. 

Although the T1-16S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions, 

grounding is important for safety and reliability. 

Check the grounding against the following criteria. 

1. The T1-16S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current 

is particularly harmful. 

2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected. 

Ground the T1-16S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point. 

3. Do not connect the ground of the T1-16S to that of high-power systems. 

4. Do not use a ground that has unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or 

ground subject to vibration. 

The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1-16S basic unit for 

grounding purpose. 

In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1-16S, the rack mounting screw is 

used for this purpose. 

System ground 


Mounting panel 

• 1.25mm 2 (16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1-16S and the expansion 

rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar. 

• 100Ω or less to ground is required. 


4.5 Power supply wiring 

! CAUTION 

Wire the power source to the T1-16S power supply terminals. 

Power source 

• Power conditions: 

Line filter 

6F3B0253 



2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or 

fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described below. 

Insulation 

transformer 


AC power supply type DC power supply type 

Rated voltage 100 to 240Vac, +10/-15% 24Vdc, +20/-15% 

Frequency 50/60Hz, ±5% - 

Power consumption 45VA or less 18W or less 

Retentive power 

interruption 

Continuous operation for less than 10ms 

• 1.25mm 2 (16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable. 

• The power cable should be separated from other cables. 




Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below. 

• AC power supply type 

100 to 240Vac 

• DC power supply type 

24Vdc 


+ 

- 

100-240Vac 

∼ 

L 

N 

24 Vdc 

+ 

- 

Grounding 

Grounding 

6F3B0253 


4.6 I/O wiring 

! CAUTION 

6F3B0253 


• Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O 

terminals. 

• 0.75mm 2 (18 AWG) to 0.3mm 2 (22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals. 

• Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200mm. 

• If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and 

I/O signal cables by or unit at least 50mm. 

• It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables. 

Input 

signal 


2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use 

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover 

the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the 

terminal blocks when wiring has been completed. 



to the T1-16S and related equipment. 

T1-16S 200mm 

or more 

Output 

signal 

High-power 

cable 




6F3B0253 


Section 5 

Operating System Overview 

5.1 Operation modes, 64 

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM, 66 

5.3 Scanning, 69 

6F3B0253 



5. Operating System Overview 

5.1 Operation modes 

The T1-16S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and 

the ERROR mode. The T1-16S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for 

system checking. 


6F3B0253 

RUN: The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode. 

In this mode, the T1-16S reads external signals, executes the user program 

stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to 

the user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1-16S performs scans the 

user program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC. 

Program changes and EEPROM write are possible while the T1-16S is in 

the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9. 

HALT: The HALT mode is a programming mode. 

In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are 

switched off. 

Program loading into the T1-16S is possible only in the HALT mode. 

For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only 

when the T1 is in the HALT mode. 

ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shutdown mode as a result of self-diagnosis. 

The T1-16S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by selfdiagnosis. 

In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are 

switched off. The cause of the shutdown can be confirmed by connecting 

the programming tool. 

To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the 

programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again. 

HOLD: The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals. 

In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output 

updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution 

while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be 

established by setting any data by using the programming tool. 

RUN-F: The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking. 

This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os. 

Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation 

even if the registered I/O modules are not actually mounted. 


6F3B0253 


The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1-16S 

and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool. 

The mode transition conditions are shown below. 

HOLD 

RUN 

Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side. 

� 

Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side. 

� 

Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from 

� 


Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from 

� 


(Power ON) 

� � 

� � 

RUN-F 

ERROR 

Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool. 

� 

HOLD command is issued from the programming tool. 

� 

HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool. 

� 

Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool. 

� 

(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis. 

� 

� � 

� 

� 

NOTE 

� 

� 

HALT 

The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode 

control switch is in R (RUN) side. 

� 




5.2 About the built-in EEPROM 

The T1-16S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features. 

The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be 

maintained without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be 

stored in the EEPROM. 

The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM. 


User program Entire program (8 k steps) and System information 

User data User specified number of Data register starting with address 0. 

It is set by SW55. 

D0000 - Dnnnn 

Setting 

information 


(up to 2048 words) 

SW36 - SW38: 

Programmer port settings 

SW55: 

Number of Data register to be saved in the EEPROM 

SW56 - SW57: 

RS-485 port settings 

Sampling trace setting information 

6F3B0253 

The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM are transferred to the RAM 

when power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM 

contents. Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents. 

Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write 

command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is overwritten 

by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again. 


EEPROM 

User program 

(8 k steps) 

and System info 

Data register 

(0 to 2048 words, 

user setting) 

Other data 

� 

� 

6F3B0253 


RAM 

User program 

(8 k steps) 

and System info 

Data register 

(D0000 to Dnnnn, 

user setting) 

Other data 

The rest of Data 

register and 

other registers 

� Executed when power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read 

command is issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible 

only in the HALT mode. 

� Executed when EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool. 

It is possible in either HALT or RUN mode. (See Note) 





6F3B0253 

Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers to be stored in 

the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048. 

The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data 

registers saved in the EEPROM. 

SW55 setting Range of Data registers saved Remarks 

value 

in EEPROM 

0 None 

1 D0000 only 

2 D0000 to D0001 

3 D0000 to D0002 

: : 

2047 D0000 to D2046 

2048 D0000 to D2047 Default value 

Others D0000 to D2047 Regarded as 2048 

When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value of 

SW55 and saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value. 

The value of SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM. 

At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1-16S checks the 

value for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to 

the Data registers of the RAM. 

NOTE 

(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay 

attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of 

EEPROM Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm 

flag (S007) comes ON. 

(2) Even in RUN mode, the EEPROM Write command can be executed. 

However, in this case, only the user program is written into the 

EEPROM. (D register data and setting information are not saved.) 

(3) The data in the EEPROM can also be read or written by using the 

program instruction (FUN236 XFER instruction). 

(4) When the EEPROM writing is executed by the XFER instruction in the 

user program, T1-16S does not update the internal EEPROM write 

counts. Therefore the EEPROM alarm flag (S007) will not correspond 

to this operation. Pay attention to the life limit of the EEPROM. 


5.3 Scanning 

6F3B0253 


The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1-16S 

from the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows, 

executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle 

starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support. 

Scan 

Power ON 

Hardware check 

Initial load 

Register/device 

initialization 

Self-diagnosis 

RUN mode 

Mode 

control 

Register/device 

initialization 

Program check 

I/O update 

Timer update 

User program 

execution 

Peripheral 

support 

HALT mode 

At the first 

scan 

At the first 

scan 

Power-up 

Initialization 

(approx. 1 s) 

Scan cycle 




Hardware check: 

Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the 

peripheral LSIs. 


6F3B0253 

Initial load: 

Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to 

section 5.2) 

Register/device initialization: 

Initializes registers and devices as shown below. 

Register/device Initialization 

External input (X/XW) Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0. 

External output (Y/YW) Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0. 

Auxiliary device/register User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices 

(R/RW) 

are retained. Others are cleared to 0. 

Special device/register 

(S/SW) 

Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0. 

Timer device/register User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are 

(T./T) 

cleared to 0. 

Counter device/register User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are 

(C./C) 

cleared to 0. 

Data register (D) User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are 

cleared to 0. 

Index register (I, J, K) Cleared to 0. 

NOTE 

(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these 

registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are 

transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the 

initialization. 

(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by 

built-in capacitor and by the optional battery if used. The back-up 

period is 1 hours or more at 25 °C. If optional battery (CR2032) is 

used, the back-up period is 1 year or more at 25 °C. 

The T1-16S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up 

initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to 

ON. Therefore, check the status of S00F in the user program and 

initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON. 

(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T, 

C and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated 

address for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the 

separate manual for the programming tool for setting the retentive 

registers. 

(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program 

debugging. For details, refer to section 6.7. 


6F3B0253 


Self-diagnosis: 

Checks the proper operation of the T1-16S itself. If an error has detected and cannot 

be recovered by re-tries, the T1-16S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis 

items, refer to section 10.2. 

Mode control: 

Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from 


The scan mode − floating scan or fixed-time scan − is also controlled hear. 

NOTE 

The floating scan: 

When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time 

is shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status. 

Scan time Scan time Scan time 

The fixed-time scan: 

The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting 

range is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time 

than the setting time, it works as the floating scan. 

Scan time (50 ms fixed) Scan time (50 ms fixed) 

(idling) (idling) 

Program check: 

At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is 

checked. 

I/O update: 

Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and 

sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output 

circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next 

I/O update timing. 

The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation. 

Timer update: 

Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing 

devices (S040 to S047). 




User program execution: 

Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction. 

This is the essential function of the T1-16S. 

In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program 

types, such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5. 


6F3B0253 

Peripheral support: 

Supports the communications with the programming tool or external devices 

connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within 

approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixedtime 

scan mode. 

If the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority mode is selected. 

In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is not limited. As 

the result, the communication response is improved although the scan time becomes 

long at the time. 


Section 6 

Programming Information 

6.1 Devices and registers, 74 

6.2 Index modification, 86 

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar, 88 

6.4 I/O allocation, 89 

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting, 91 

6.6 User program configuration, 92 

6.7 Programming language, 98 

6.8 Program execution sequence, 99 

6.9 On-line debug support functions, 100 

6.10 Password protection, 103 

6F3B0253 



6. Programming Information 

6.1 Devices and registers 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF 

information, such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit) 

instructions, such as those for data transfer and arithmetic operations. 

Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers 

are used to store 16-bit data. 

Devices are divided into six types: 

X External input devices 

Y External output devices 

R Auxiliary relay devices 

S Special devices 

T. Timer devices 

C. Counter devices 

Registers are divided into eight types: 

XW External input registers 

YW External output registers 

RW Auxiliary relay registers 

SW Special registers 

T Timer registers 

C Counter registers 

D Data registers 

I, J, K Index registers 

Device and register numbers 

X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X004, for example, 

represents the number 4 bit in the XW00 register. 

Bit position / Number 

(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

XW00 1 

X004 

Thus, "X004 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW00 is 1. 

Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner. 


Addressing devices 

6F3B0253 


A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consist of a register number and bit position 

as follows. 

X 00 4 

Represents bit position 0 to F in the register. 

Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding 

device. 

Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S) 

As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as 

follows. 

T. 12 

Addressing registers 

Corresponding register number. (decimal number) 

Represents the type of device. (T. or C.) 

Dot (.) is used to identify as device. 

A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows. 

XW 01 

Register number. (decimal number) 

Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D) 

The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number. 

J 

I, J, or K 




Available address range 

Device/register Symbol 


Number of points Address range 

External input device X Total 512 points X000 - X31F 

External output device Y 

Y020 - Y31F 

External input register XW Total 32 words XW00 - XW31 

External output register YW 

YW02 - YW31 

Auxiliary relay device R 4096 points R000 - R255F 

Auxiliary relay register RW 256 words RW000 - RW255 

Special device S 1024 points S000 - S63F 

Special register SW 64 words SW00 - SW63 

Timer device T. 256 points T.000 - T.255 

Timer register T 256 words T000 - T255 

Counter device C. 256 points C.000 - C.255 

Counter register C 256 words C000 - C255 

Data register D 4096 words D0000 - D4095 

Index register 

I 1 word I (no address) 

J 1 word J (no address) 

K 1 word K (no address) 

NOTE 


6F3B0253 

(1) 1 word = 16 bits 

(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to 

H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers. 

The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter 

register is 0 to 65535. 

(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers. 

In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data. 

(MSB) F -------------0 F ------------ 0 (LSB) 

D0101 D0100 

Upper 16bits Lower 16bits 

In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘⋅’. 

For example, D0101⋅D0100. 


6F3B0253 


External input devices (X) 

These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the 

input circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program. 

External output devices (Y) 

The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external 

devices through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program. 

External input registers (XW) 

These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values, which are received from the input 

circuits. 

External output registers (YW) 

These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values, which are sent to the output 

circuits. 

Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW) 

The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences. 

The auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function 

instructions. The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is 

necessary to move the data to Y/YW. 

It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a 

power failure. See section 5.3. 

Timer devices and registers (T./T) 

The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the 

on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers. 

0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided. 

Time base T1-16S 

0.01 s T000 to T063 

0.1 s T064 to T255 

The timer devices (T.) work as the output of the timer instructions. 

It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a 






6F3B0253 

Counter devices and registers (C./C) 

The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT) 

and the up-down counter (U/D) instructions. 

The counter devices (C.) work as the output of the counter instructions. 

It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a 


Data registers (D) 

Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW) 

except that the D registers cannot be used as devices. 

A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and 

transferred into the RAM at the initial load. 

The range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM can be specified by SW55. 

See section 5.2. 

It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a 


Index registers (I, J, and K) 

These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register. 

For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates 

D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2. 

I 

D0000 D0100 if I=100 


6F3B0253 


Special devices and registers (S/SW) 

The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See 

list below. 

Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

S000 0: Initialization 4: HOLD mode 

S001 T1/T1S operation mode 1: HALT mode 6: ERROR mode 

S002 2: RUN mode 

S003 3: RUN-F mode 

S004 CPU error (down) ON at error state (related to SW01) 

S005 I/O error (down) ON at error state (related to SW02) 

S006 Program error (down) ON at error state (related to SW03) 

S007 EEPROM alarm (alarm) ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times 

S008 Fixed-time scan time-over ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting 

(alarm) 

time as fixed-time scan 

S009 − Reserved 

S00A Clock/calendar error 

(alarm) 

ON when clock/calendar data is illegal 

S00B − Reserved 

S00C − Reserved 

S00D TL-F10 error (alarm) ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs 

S00E − Reserved 

S00F Retentive data invalid 

(alarm) 

ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid 

NOTE 

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices 

are read only for user. 

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore 

these devices cannot be used in the user program. 

(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode. 

These devices can be used in the user program. 




Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

S010 System ROM error (down) ON at error state 

S011 System RAM error (down) ON at error state 

S012 Program memory error 

(down) 

ON at error state 

S013 EEPROM error (down) ON at error state 







S01A − Reserved 



S01D − Reserved 


S01F Watchdog timer error 

(down) 

ON at error state 


S021 I/O mismatch (down) ON at error state 














S02F − Reserved 

NOTE 


6F3B0253 






6F3B0253 


Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

S030 Program error ON at error state (related to SW06) 

S031 Scan time over (down) ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms 















S040 Timing relay 0.1 s OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval) 


S042 Timing relay 0.4 s OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval) All OFF at the 

S043 Timing relay 0.8 s OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval) beginning of 

S044 Timing relay 1.0 s OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval) RUN mode 










S04E Always OFF Always OFF 

S04F Always ON Always ON 

NOTE 









6F3B0253 

Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

S050 CF (carry flag) Used for instructions which manipulate carry 

S051 ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred 

(related to alarm flags of SW06) 















S060 Illegal instruction (down) ON when illegal instruction is detected 




S064 Boundary error (alarm) ON when illegal address is designated by indirect 

addressing (operation continued) 




S068 Division error (alarm) ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation 

continued) 

S069 BCD data error (alarm) ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD 

operation instructions (operation continued) 

S06A Table operation error ON when table size error has detected in table 

(alarm) 

operation instructions (operation continued) (T1S only) 

S06B Encode error (alarm) ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation 

continued) 





NOTE 



(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user 

program. 


6F3B0253 


Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

SW07 Clock/calendar (Year) Lower 2 digits of the calendar year 

(01, 02, ... ) 

SW08 Clock/calendar (Month) Month (01, 02, ... 12) They are stored in 

SW09 Clock/calendar (Day) Day (01, 02, ... 31) the lower 8 bits by 

SW10 Clock/calendar (Hour) Hour (00, 01, ... 59) BCD code 

SW11 Clock/calendar (Minute) Minute (00, 01, ... 59) 

SW12 Clock/calendar (Second) Second (00, 01, ... 59) 

SW13 Clock/calendar (Week) Day of the week 

(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06) 

SW14 − Reserved 

SW15 Peripheral support priority Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority 

SW16 Mode of special input 

functions 

Used to select the special input functions 

SW17 Input filter constant Used to set the input filter constant 

SW18 Preset values for high Used to set the preset values for high speed counters 

SW19 

SW20 

SW21 

speed counter 

SW22 Count values for high Present count values of the high speed counters are 

SW23 speed counter stored 

SW24 High speed counter control 

flags 

Control flags for the high speed counters 


SW26 Mode of special output 

functions 

Used to select the special output functions 

SW27 Special output control flags Control flags for the pulse/PWM output 

SW28 Special output frequency 

setting 

Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output 

SW29 PWM output duty setting Pulse duty setting for the PWM output 

SW30 Analog setting value 1 Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0 

SW31 Analog setting value 2 Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1 



SW34 TL-F10 send data TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master) 

SW35 TL-F10 receive data TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master) 

SW36 PRG port station address Used to set the programmer port station address 

(1 to 32) 

SW37 PRG port parity Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none, 

1=odd) 

SW38 PRG port response delay Used to set the programmer port response delay time 

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms) 

NOTE 









6F3B0253 

Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

S390 Timer interrupt execution 

status 

ON during execution 

S391 I/O interrupt #1 execution 

status 



status 



status 



status 














S401 HOLD device ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also 

available) 
















6F3B0253 


Device/ 

register 

Name Function 

SW41 Sub-program #1 execution Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is 

status 

executed 













SW54 Basic unit I/O LED display Used to display the selected I/O module status 

mode 

(0 = Basic unit, 1 to 8 = I/O module slot 0 to 7, 

9 and 10 = TOSLINE-F10) 

SW55 Number of EEPROM write Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in 

data 

the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048) 

SW56 RS-485 port operation Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode 

mode 

(0 = Computer link, 1 = Data link, 2 = Free ASCII, 

3 = Inverter connection) 

SW57 RS-485 port response Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time 

delay 

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms) 

SW58 RS-485 port Free ASCII 

flags 

Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function 






NOTE 

(1) For details of SW54, refer to section 1.5.1. 

(2) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2. 

(3) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication 

function manual. 




6.2 Index modification 

When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly 

designating the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct 

addressing’. 


6F3B0253 

As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination 

with the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is 

called ‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified 

using an index register, this is called ‘index modification’. 

Example 1) 

⎯[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]⎯ 

Data transfer instruction 

Transfer data of RW10 to D1000 

Example 2) 

I J 

⎯[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]⎯ 

Data transfer instruction (with index modification) 

Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J) 

(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200) 

There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers 

(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3 

types of index register. 

There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These 

are designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc. 

⎯[ 00064 MOV I ]⎯ (substitutes 64 in index register I) 

⎯[ D0035 MOV J ]⎯ (substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J) 

⎯[ RW20 + 00030 → K ]⎯ (substitutes the result of addition in index register K) 

NOTE 

(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers. 

(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the 

combinations J×I and K×J are allowed. 


The followings are examples of index modifications. 

I 

RW10 

! CAUTION 

J 

D0201⋅D0200 

NOTE 

When I = 0, it designates RW10. 


When I = -1, it designates RW09. 


When I = -10, it designates RW00. 

6F3B0253 


When J = 0, it designates D0201⋅D0200. 



When J = -1, it designates D0200⋅D0199. 

When J = -2, it designates D0199⋅D0198. 

Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index 

modification. The address range is not checked by the T1-16S. 

Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be 

used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if 

a value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before 

the index modification. 




6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (Enhanced model only) 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16S enhanced model is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year, 

month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. 

These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format 

as follows. 

Register Function Data 

SW07 Year 1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, 2002 = H0002 ... 

SW08 Month Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012 

SW09 Day 1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031 

SW10 Hour H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023 

SW11 Minute H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059 

SW12 Second H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059 

SW13 Week Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006 

Program example: 

In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm. 

(H0018) 

Clock/calendar back up: 

The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1-16S is off by 

built-in capacitor and by the optional battery (CR2032) if used. Its buck-up period is as 

follows. 

Environment 

Expected value Guarantee value 

temperature Capacitor Battery Capacitor Battery 

Under 30 °C (86 °F) 2 hours 2 year 1 hours 1 year 

Over 30 °C (86 °F) 1 hours 1 year 30 minutes 6 months 

As shown in the table, it is recommended to use the optional battery when the realtime 

clock/calendar function is used. 

In the T1-16S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by 

excess power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the 

clock/calendar is used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user 

program. 

Setting the clock/calendar: 

To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the 

week data is automatically calculated. 

(1) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the 

programming tool. 

(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program. 


6.4 I/O allocation 

6F3B0253 


The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW). 

The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers 

(Y/YW). 

The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus 

one register number can be assigned for either input or output. 

As for the T1-16S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows. 

Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007) 

T1-16S Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027) 

X000 --- X007 Y020---- Y027 

Any operations for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1-16S basic unit is 

used. 

However, if the I/O modules are used with the T1-16S, the I/O allocation operation is 

necessary. Refer to the separate manual "T1-16S User's Manual - I/O Modules -". 





6F3B0253 

Internally, the T1-16S has information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This 

I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software, 

i.e. register/device. 

The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows. 

Unit Slot 

PU 

I/O type 

0 

1 

2 

X+Y 4W 

0 3 

4 

5 

1 

6 

7 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

The T1-16S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0 at 

unit 0 position when the memory clear is executed for the T1-16S. 

When the T1-16S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table 

should be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation), 

refer to the programming tool manual. 

NOTE 

PU slot must be blank 

Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02 

and YW03 are assigned internally) 

Slots 1 to 7 of unit 0 are not used 

(must be blank) 

These slots are for I/O modules 

(1) Unit base address setting function is not supported by the T1-16S. 

Do not use this function with the T1-16S. It will causes malfunction. 

(2) When the TOSLINE-F10 station module FR112M is used, allocate it at 

the end of the I/O modules. 


6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting 

6F3B0253 


The program capacity of the T1-16S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1-16S’s 

program capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1-16S’s memory mode. 

That is, the T1-16S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode. 

In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program 

capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support 

functions. 

To set the T1-16S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the 

System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write 

command. 




6.6 User program configuration 


6F3B0253 

A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user 

program’. The T1-16S has 8 k steps capacity for storing the user program. 

A ‘step’ is the minimum unit, which composes an instruction. Number of steps required 

for one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1. 

The figure below shows the T1-16S’s memory configuration. 

4 k or 8 k steps 

NOTE 

RAM 

System information 

User program 

Data registers 

mentioned in 

section 5.2 

Other registers/ 

devices 

Back-up area 

by EEPROM 

For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2. 


System information 

6F3B0253 


System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The 

following contents are included in the system information. 

(1) Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type) 

(2) User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used) 

(3) Passwords 

(4) Retentive register area information 

(5) T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps 

(6) Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval) 

(7) Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication 

parameters (Enhanced model) 

(8) I/O allocation table 

(9) Input force table 

The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when this 

information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these 

are over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing. 

User program 

The T1-16S has a capacity of 8 k steps of the user program. 

The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram, 

and is managed by units called blocks in each program types. 

User program configuration Program type internal configuration 

(Program types) (Blocks) 

Main program 

Sub-program #1 

Timer interrupt 

I/O interrupt #1 




Subroutine 

Block 1 

Block 2 

Block 10 

Block N 

(N = max. 256) 

Block 1 




In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in 

section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are 

explained in the following sections. 

The following 8 program types are supported by the T1-16S. 

(1) Main program 

(2) Sub-program #1 

(3) Timer interrupt program 

(4) I/O interrupt program #1 




(8) Subroutine 

The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program 

execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program 

becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive. 


6F3B0253 

In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is 

the total capacity. 

6.6.1 Main program 

The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan. 

1 scan time 

Mode I/O Timer Main program Mode I/O 

Time 

Timer 

In the above figure, 

Mode means the mode control operation 

I/O means the I/O update processing 

Timer means the timer up date processing 

Main program means the main program execution 

the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure. 

Main program 

The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction. 

Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not 

be executed. 


6.6.2 Sub-program #1 

6F3B0253 


If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first 

scan (before main program execution). 

Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers. 

The sub-program #1 is called the initial program. 

The figure below shows the first scan operation. 

RUN mode 

transition 1st scan 2nd scan 

The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction. 

6.6.3 Timer interrupt program 

Scan 

I/O Timer Sub#1 Main program Mode I/O Timer Main program 

The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user 

specified interval, with suspending other operation. 

The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units) 


1 scan 

1 scan 


interval 

Time 

Time 

1 scan 


interval 

1 scan 

The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction. 




6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs 


6F3B0253 

The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately 

when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation. 

The following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S. 

(1) I/O interrupt #1 

The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count 

value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately 

with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by 

the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3. 


The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to 

section 8.3 for details. 


The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the 

interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is 

activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O 

interrupt #3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information, 

refer to section 8.4. 


The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section 

8.4 for details. 

If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including 

the timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing 

the other interrupt program execution. 

If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as 

follows. 

Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4 


6.6.5 Subroutines 

6F3B0253 


In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be 

programmed. 

The T1-16S supports up to 256 subroutines. 

The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types 

(main program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines. 

One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET 

instruction. 

It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available 

subroutine numbers are 0 to 255. 

⎯[ SUBR (000) ]⎯ 

Subroutine number 

The RET instruction has no subroutine number. 

The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL 

instruction has the subroutine number to be called. 

⎯[ CALL N.000 ]⎯ 

Subroutine number 

Main program 

Execution 

Subroutine 

flow 

⎥⎯[ SUBR (000) ]⎯⎯⎯⎜ 

⎥⎯⎜⎥⎯[ CALL N.000 ]⎯⎯⎜ 

NOTE 

⎥⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ [ RET ]⎯⎜ 

(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one 

subroutine in one block is recommended. 

(2) From the inside of a subroutine, other subroutines can be called 

(nesting). Its allowable level is up to 3 levels. 




6.7 Programming language 


6F3B0253 

The programming language of the T1-16S is ‘ladder diagram’. 

Ladder diagram is a language, which composes program using relay symbols as a 

base in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to 

achieve an efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations 

of relay symbols and function blocks are used. 

The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as 

one network which is connected each other. 

Rung number 

1 

2 

3 

The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and 

cannot be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs. 

The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines × 12 columns. 

A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below. 

Rung 

When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON. 

Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less. 

Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON. 


6.8 Program execution sequence 

The instructions execution sequence is shown below. 

6F3B0253 


(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block, which 

contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program). 

(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block 

(or the END instruction). 

(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung. 

� When there is no vertical 

connection, they are 

executed from left to right. 

� When there is an OR 

connection, the OR logic 

portion is executed first. 

� When there is a branch, they 

are executed in the order from 

the upper line to the lower line. 

A combination of � and � 

� 

above. 

The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also 

follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as 

jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the 

specifications of each instruction. 



1 

1 

5 

1 

1 

2 

7 

2 

2 

3 

2 

3 

3 

4 

3 

5 

4 

6 

6 

4 

7 

4 

6 

5 

8


6.9 On-line debug support functions 


6F3B0253 

The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1-16S for effective 

program debugging. 

On-line function 4 k mode 8 k mode 

Force function Yes Yes 

Sampling trace function Yes Yes 

Changing timer /counter 

preset value 

Yes Yes 

Changing constant operand of 

function instruction 

Yes Yes 

Changing device directly Yes Yes 

Program changing in edit 

mode 

Yes No 

EEPROM write command Yes Yes 

NOTE 

Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode. 

Force function 

Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force. 

The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input 

device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed 

manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the 

corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the 

external input devices (X). 

The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the 

program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be 

changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, 

regardless of the coil circuit execution status. 

On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows. 

Forced input 

Forced coil 

NOTE 

X005 x005 

Normal 

Normal 

Forced 

Y023 Y023 

Forced 

If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force 

designation, the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM. 

Because the force function is debugging function, release all force 

designation before executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch 

release command is available when the T1-16S is in HALT mode. 


6F3B0253 


Sampling trace function 

The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every 

specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer 

(T-PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register). 

The minimum sampling timing is the T1-16S’s scan cycle. 

This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting. 


Sampling target Devices (up to 8) and 

Registers (up to 3) 

Sampling capacity 256 times 

The collected data is stored in the T1-16S internal buffer. 

The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed. 

The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger 

condition) can be specified by status changing of devices. 

For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to 

the manual for T-PDS. 

NOTE 

T-PDS screen example of device timing chart 

(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type. 

(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used. 

(3) The After times setting is not effective for the T1-16S. 





6F3B0253 

Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing 

The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in online 

(during RUN) by using the programming tool. 

Function instruction constant operand changing 

The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) 

by using the programming tool. 

Device changing 

The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by 

using the programming tool. 

On-line program changing 

When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using 

normal edit mode. (rung by rung) 

In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the 

following instructions. 

NOTE 

END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET 

The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore, 

when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation 

before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be 

overwritten. 

On-line EEPROM write 

The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode. 

In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM. 

During this operation, the T1-16S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the 

time limit per scan, the T1-16S’s control operation is not stopped. 


6.10 Password protection 

6F3B0253 


The T1-16S has the password function to protect the user program and data from 

unauthorized operations. 

There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be 

registered to control the protection levels. 

These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered, 

changed or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. 

The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual 

for the programming tool. 

Protection level 4 (disabled functions) 

• Writing register/device data 

• Writing system information 

• I/O allocation 


• Reading program 

• Program write into EEPROM 


• Clear memory 

• Writing/loading program 

• T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool) 

• Setting/changing passwords 


• None (all functions are available) 

When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1-16S will be started as 

protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes 

the protection level to 2. 

NOTE 

Strict 

When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password. 

Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords. 




6F3B0253 


Section 7 

Instructions 

7.1 List of instructions, 106 

7.2 Instruction specifications, 116 

6F3B0253 



7. Instructions 

7.1 List of instructions 


6F3B0253 

The T1-16S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 97 types of function 

instructions as listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in 

detail later. 

The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the 

following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.) 

Basic ladder instructions 

FUN 

No. 

Name Expression Function Steps Speed 

(µs) 

− NO contact A NO (normally open) contact of 

device A. 

− NC contact A 

NC (normally closed) contact 

of device A. 

− Transitional 

Turns ON output for 1 scan 

contact (rising) 

when input changes from OFF 

to ON. 

− Transitional 


contact (falling) 

when input changes from ON 

to OFF. 

− Coil A 

Relay coil of device A. 

Page 

1 1.4 - 3.3 117 

1 1.4 - 3.3 118 

1 3.0 119 

1 3.0 120 

1 2.3 121 

− Forced coil A 

Forced coil of device A. State 

of device A is retained 

regardless of the input state. 

1 2.3 122 

− Inverter I Inverts the input state. 1 1.4 - 3.3 123 

− Invert coil A 

I 

Stores the inverse state of 

input into device A. 

1 2.3 124 

− Positive pulse 

contact 

− Negative pulse 

contact 

A 

P 

A 

N 

− Positive pulse coil A 

P 

− Negative pulse coil A 

N 


when input is ON and device A 

changes from OFF to ON. 


when input is ON and device A 

changes from ON to OFF. 

Turns ON device A for 1 scan 

when input changes from OFF 

to ON. 

Turns ON device A for 1 scan 

when input changes from ON 

to OFF. 

− ON delay timer −[ A TON B ]− Turns ON output when the 

time specified by A has 

elapsed after the input came 

ON. B is a timer register. 

− OFF delay timer −[ A TOF B ]− Turns OFF output when the 

time specified by A has 

elapsed after the input came 

OFF. B is a timer register. 

− Single shot timer −[ A SS B ]− Turns ON output for the time 

specified by A when the input 

comes ON. B is a timer 

register. 

1 125 

1 126 

1 127 

1 128 

2 12.6 129 

2 12.8 130 

2 13.0 131 


Basic ladder instructions (continued) 

6F3B0253 


FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

− Counter C CNT Q Counts the number of cycles 

E A B the count input (C) comes ON 

while the enable input (E) is 

ON, and turns ON output (Q) 

when the count reaches to the 

value specified by A. B is a 

counter register. 

2 22.6 132 

− Master control set ⎥−−[ MCS ]−⎢ Turns OFF power rail between 1 3.75 

− Master control reset ⎥−−[ MCR ]−⎢ MCS and MCR when MCS 

input is OFF. 

1 

(in a 

pair) 

133 

− Jump control set ⎥−−[ JCS ]−⎢ Jumps from JCS to JCR when 1 2.75 

− Jump control reset ⎥−−[ JCR ]−⎢ JCS input is ON. 

1 

(in a 

pair) 

134 

− End ⎥−−[ END ]−⎢ Indicates end of main program 

or sub-program. 

1 1.4 135 

Data transfer instructions 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

018 Data transfer −[ A MOV B ]− Transfers data of A to B. 3 4.2 136 

019 Double-word 

data transfer 

−[ A+1⋅A DMOV B+1⋅B ]− Transfers double-word data 

of A+1⋅A to B+1⋅B. 

3 7.2 137 

020 Invert transfer −[ A NOT B ]− Transfers bit-inverted data of 

A to B. 

3 4.6 138 

022 Data exchange −[ A XCHG B ]− Exchanges data of A with B. 3 6.5 139 

024 Table initialize −[ A TINZ (n) B ]− Transfers data of A to n 

registers starting with B. 

3 140 

025 Table transfer −[ A TMOV (n) B ]− Transfers data of n registers 

starting with A to n registers 

starting with B. 

3 141 

026 Table invert −[ A TNOT (n) B ]− Transfers bit-inverted data of 

transfer 

n registers starting with A to 

n registers starting with B. 

3 142 

090 Multiplexer −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]− Transfers data from the 

register specified by B in the 

table, size n starting with A, 

to C. 

5 70.6 176 

091 Demultiplexer −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]− Transfers data from A to the 

register specified by B in the 

table, size n starting with C. 

5 71.5 177 




Arithmetic operations 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

027 Addition −[ A + B → C ]− Adds data of A and B, and 

stores the result in C. 

4 6.5 143 

028 Subtraction −[ A - B → C ]− Subtracts data of B from A, 

and stores the result in C. 

4 6.5 144 

029 Multiplication −[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Multiplies data of A and B, 

and stores the result in 

double-length register C+1⋅C. 

4 8.8 145 

030 Division −[ A / B → C ]− Divides data of A by B, and 

stores the quotient in C and 

the reminder in C+1. 

4 9.7 146 

031 Double-word −[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Adds data of A+1⋅A and 

addition 

B+1⋅B, and stores the result 

in C+1⋅C. 

4 11.6 147 

032 Double-word −[ A+1⋅A D- B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Subtracts data of B+1⋅B from 

subtraction 

A+1⋅A, and stores the result 

in C+1⋅C. 

4 11.7 148 

035 Addition with −[ A +C B → C ]− Adds data of A, B and the 

carry 

carry, and stores the result in 

C. The carry flag changes 

according to the result. 

4 9.7 149 

036 Subtraction −[ A -C B → C ]− Subtracts data of B and the 

with carry 

carry from A, and stores the 

result in C. The carry flag 

changes according to the 

result. 

4 9.7 150 

039 Unsigned −[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Multiplies data of A and B, 

multiplication 

and stores the result in 


(Unsigned integer operation) 

4 151 

040 Unsigned −[ A U/ B → C ]− Divides data of A by B, and 

division 

stores the quotient in C and 

the reminder in C+1. 


4 152 

041 Unsigned −[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]− Divides data of A+1⋅A by B, 

double/single 

division 

and stores the quotient in C 

and the reminder in C+1. 


4 15.3 153 

043 Increment −[ +1 A ]− Increments data of A by 1. 2 4.6 154 

044 Decrement −[ -1 A ]− Decrements data of A by 1. 2 4.6 155 


6F3B0253 


Logical operations 

6F3B0253 


FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

048 AND −[ A AND B → C ]− Finds logical AND of A and B, 

and stores it in C. 

4 5.7 156 

050 OR −[ A OR B → C ]− Finds logical OR of A and B, 

and stores it in C. 

4 5.7 157 

052 Exclusive OR −[ A EOR B → C ]− Finds logical exclusive OR of A 

and B, and stores it in C. 

4 5.7 158 

064 Bit test −[ A TEST B ]− Turns ON output if logical AND 

of A and B is not 0. 

3 5.0 163 

Shift operations 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

068 1 bit shift right −[ SHR1 A ]− Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right 

(LSB direction). The carry flag 2 6.8 164 

changes according to the result. 

069 1 bit shift left −[ SHL1 A ]− Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left 

(MSB direction). The carry flag 


070 n bit shift right −[ A SHR n → B ]− Shifts data of A n bits to the 

right (LSB direction) and stores 

the result in B. The carry flag 


071 n bit shift left −[ A SHL n → B ]− Shifts data of A n bits to the left 

(MSB direction) and stores the 

result in B. The carry flag 

074 Shift register D SR Q 

S (n) 

E A 

075 Bi-directional 

shift register 

D DSR Q 

S (n) 

E 

L A 


When shift input (S) comes ON, 

shifts the data of specified shift 

register 1 bit to the left, and 

stores data input (D) state into 

A. This operation is enabled 

while enable input (E) is ON. 

The carry flag changes 


Shift register: n devices starting 

with device A. 

When shift input (S) comes ON, 

shifts the data of specified shift 

register 1 bit to the left or to the 

right depending on direction 

input (L). This operation is 

enabled while enable input (E) is 

ON. The carry flag changes 


Shift register: n devices starting 

with device A. 

Direction: Left when L is ON, 

right when L is OFF 

2 6.8 165 

4 10.2 166 

4 10.2 167 

3 

3 

65.9 - 

76.2 

69.0 - 

79.3 

168 

170 




Rotate operations 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

078 1 bit rotate −[ RTR1 A ]− Rotates data of A 1 bit to the 

right 

right (LSB direction). The 

carry flag changes according 

to the result. 

2 6.8 172 

079 1 bit rotate left −[ RTL1 A ]− Rotates data of A 1 bit to the 

left (MSB direction). The 



2 6.8 173 

080 n bit rotate −[ A RTR n → B ]− Rotates data of A n bits to 

right 

the right (LSB direction) and 

stores the result in B. The 



4 10.2 174 

081 n bit rotate left −[ A RTL n → B ]− Rotates data of A n bits to 

the left (MSB direction) and 

stores the result in B. The 



4 10.2 175 

Compare instructions 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

096 Greater than −[ A > B ]− Turns ON output if A > B. 3 6.1 178 

097 Greater than or 

equal 

−[ A >= B ]− Turns ON output if A ≥ B. 

3 5.3 179 

098 Equal −[ A = B ]− Turns ON output if A = B. 3 5.0 180 

099 Not equal −[ A B ]− Turns ON output if A ≠ B. 3 5.0 181 

100 Less than −[ A 

101 Less than or 

equal 

−[ A B+1⋅B ]− Turns ON output 

if A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B. 

3 6.1 184 

103 Double-word −[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]− Turns ON output 

greater than or 

equal 

if A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B. 3 5.3 185 


equal 

−[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]− Turns ON output 

if A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B. 

3 5.0 186 


not equal 

−[ A+1⋅A D B+1⋅B ]− Turns ON output 

if A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B. 

3 5.0 187 


less than 

−[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]− Turns ON output 

if A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B. 

3 6.1 188 

107 Double-word −[ A+1⋅A D

Compare instructions (continued) 

6F3B0253 


FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

108 Unsigned 

greater than 

−[ A U> B ]− Turns ON output if A > B. 

(Unsigned integer compare) 

3 190 

109 Unsigned −[ A U>= B ]− Turns ON output if A ≥ B. 

greater than or 

equal 

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 191 

110 Unsigned 

equal 

−[ A U= B ]− Turns ON output if A = B. 


3 192 

111 Unsigned 

not equal 

−[ A U B ]− Turns ON output if A ≠ B. 


3 193 

112 Unsigned 

less than 

−[ A U


3 194 

113 Unsigned −[ A U


Program control instructions 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

128 Subroutine call −[ CALL N. n ]− Calls the subroutine number n. 2 21.0 203 

129 Subroutine 

return 

⎥−−[ RET ]−⎢ Indicates the end of a 

subroutine. 

1 

(in a 

pair) 

204 

132 FOR 

133 NEXT 

−[ FOR n ]− 

−[ NEXT ]− 

When the input of FOR is ON, 

executes the segment from 

FOR to NEXT the number of 

times specified by n. 

2 

1 

22.0 

(in a 

pair) 

205 

206 

137 Subroutine 

entry 

⎥−[ SUBR (n) ]−−⎢ Indicates the start of the 

subroutine number n. 

2 

included 

in CALL 207 

140 Enable 

interrupt 

141 Disable 

interrupt 

−[ EI ]− 

−[ DI ]− 

Enables execution of interrupt 

program. 

Disables execution of interrupt 

program. 

1 

1 

27.6 

(in a 

pair) 

208 

209 

142 Interrupt return ⎥−−[ IRET ]−⎢ Indicates the end of an interrupt 

program. 

1 1.4 210 

143 Watchdog 

timer reset 

−[ WDT n ]− Extends the scan time over 

detection time. 

2 16.1 211 

144 Step sequence 

initialize 

−[ STIZ (n) A ]− Resets OFF the n 

devices stating with 

A, and sets ON A. 

These 

configure 

a series 

3 

59.9 - 

65.0 

212 

145 Step sequence −[ STIN A ]− Turns ON output if of step 

input 

input is ON and A is 

ON. 

sequence 2 27.0 213 

146 Step sequence −[ STOT A ]−⎢ When input is ON, 

output 

resets OFF the 

devices of STIN on 

the same rung, and 

sets ON A. 

2 

27.0 - 

119.0 

214 

RAS 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

154 Set calendar −[ A CLND ]− Sets 6 registers data starting 

with A into clock/calendar. 

2 217 

155 Calendar −[ A CLDS B ]− Calculates difference between 

operation 

present date & time and past 

date & time stored in 6 registers 

starting with A, and stores the 

result in 6 registers starting with 

B. 

3 218 


6F3B0253 


Functions 

6F3B0253 


FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

056 Moving −[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Calculates the average value 

average 

of latest n scan values of A, 

and stores the result in C. 

5 159 

061 Digital filter −[ A DFL B → C ]− Filters the value of A by filter 

constant specified by B, and 

stores the result in C. 

4 160 

156 Pre-derivative −[ A PID3 B → C ]− Performs PID control. (pre- 

real PID 

derivative real PID algorithm) 

Process value (PV): A 

Set value (SV): A+1 

PID parameters: B and after 

Manipulation value (MV): C 

4 

85.0 - 

428.0 

219 

160 Upper limit −[ A UL B → C ]− Upper limits the value of A 

by B, and stores the result in 

C. 

4 224 

161 Lower limit −[ A LL B → C ]− Lower limits the value of A 

by B, and stores the result in 

C. 

4 225 

162 Maximum −[ A MAX (n) B ]− Finds the maximum value of 

value 

n registers data starting with 

A, and stores the value in C 

and the pointer in C+1. 

4 226 

163 Minimum value −[ A MIN (n) B ]− Finds the minimum value of 

n registers data starting with 

A, and stores the value in C 

and the pointer in C+1. 

4 227 

164 Average value −[ A AVE (n) B ]− Calculates the average value 

of n registers data starting 

with A, and stores the result 

in C. 

4 228 

165 Function −[ A FG (n) B → C ]− Finds f(x) for given x=A, and 

generator 

stores it in C. The function 

f(x) is defined by parameters 

stored in a table 2×n 

registers starting with B. 

5 

77.7 - 

142.1 

229 




Conversion instructions 

FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Page 

062 Hex to ASCII −[ A HTOA (n) B ]− Converts the hexadecimal 

conversion 

data of n words stating with 

A into ASCII characters, and 

stores them in nx2 registers 

starting with B. 

4 161 

063 ASCII to Hex −[ A ATOH (n) B ]− Converts the ASCII 

conversion 

characters stored in n 

registers stating with A into 

hexadecimal data, and stores 

them in n/2 registers starting 

with B. 

4 162 

180 Absolute value −[ A ABS B ]− Stores the absolute value of 

A in B. 

3 5.0 231 

182 2’s 

−[ A NEG B ]− Stores the 2’s complement 

complement 

value of A in B. 3 4.6 232 


2’s 

complement 

185 7-segment 

decode 

186 ASCII 

conversion 

188 Binary 

conversion 

190 BCD 

conversion 


−[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]− Stores the 2’s complement 

value of A+1⋅A in B+1⋅B. 3 4.6 233 

−[ A 7SEG B ]− Converts lower 4 bits of A 

into 7-segment code, and 

stores it in B. 

−[ A ASC B ]− Converts the alphanumerics 

(max. 16 characters) of A 

into ASCII codes, and stores 

them in registers starting 

with B. 

−[ A BIN B ]− Converts the BCD data in A 

into binary data, and stores it 

in B. 

−[ A BCD B ]− Converts the binary data in A 

into BCD data, and stores it 

in B. 

3 43.9 234 

3 - 10 

29.8 - 

49.6 

236 

3 65.5 237 

3 55.6 238 

6F3B0253 


Special I/O instructions 

6F3B0253 


FUN 

No. 


(µs) 

Available Page 

235 Direct I/O −[ I/O (n) A ]− Performs the immediate 

block I/O transfer of n 

registers starting with A. 

3 

20.7 + 

21.3 × n 

√ *1 

257 

236 Expanded data 

transfer 

−[ A XFER B → C ]− Writes data into the built-in 

EEPROM, or reads data 

from the EEPROM. The 

transfer source and 

destination are indirectly 

designated by A and C. The 

transfer register size is 

designated by B. 

4 

54.0 

1w 

read 

- 

7130 

16w 

write 

√ 259 

*1: Direct I/O instruction is effective only for the basic unit inputs/outputs. 

*2: The expanded data transfer (XFER) instruction supports some special functions. It 

also supports the communication function. The execution speed shown in the 

above table is for the EEPROM read/write function. When the Inverter connection 

mode is selected, the execution speed of this instruction is typically 150 µs (max. 

500 µs). 

NOTE 

The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the 

execution speed column show the execution time without index 

modification. 

If index modification is used, approx. 20 µs is added per one indexed 

operand. 




7.2 Instruction specifications 

The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each 

instruction. On each page, the following items are explained. 

Expression 

Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters. 

Function 

Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the 

Expression box. 

Execution condition 

Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status. 


6F3B0253 

Operand 

Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant 

operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (√), 

it means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to 

2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available. 

Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for 

each operand. 

Example 

Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example. 

Note 

Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction. 


Expression 

A 

Input Output 

NO contact 

Function 

NO (normally open) contact of device A. 

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON. 


Input Operation Output 

OFF Regardless of the state of device A OFF 

ON When device A is OFF OFF 

When device A is ON ON 

6F3B0253 


Operand 

Name Device Register Constant Index 

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K 

A Device √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON. 

X000 

R001 

Y022 




Expression 

A 

Input Output 

NC contact 

Function 

NC (normally closed) contact of device A. 

When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON. 




ON When device A is OFF ON 

When device A is ON OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Device √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF. 

X000 

R001 

Y022 


Expression 

Input Output 

Transitional contact (Rising edge) 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON. 



OFF Regardless of the input state at last scan OFF 

ON When the input state at last scan is OFF ON 

When the input state at last scan is ON OFF 

Operand 

No operand is required. 

Example 

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON. 

X000 

Y022 

1 scan time 1 scan time 

Note 

• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total) 

• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048. 

( P N (P) (N) total) 




Expression 

Input Output 

Transitional contact (Falling edge) 

Function 

When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF. 



OFF When the input state at last scan is OFF OFF 

When the input state at last scan is ON ON 

ON Regardless of the input state at last scan OFF 

Operand 


Example 

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF. 

X000 

Y022 



Note 

• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total) 

• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048. 


6F3B0253 


( ) Coil 

Expression 

A 

Input ( ) 

Function 

Relay coil of device A. 

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON. 



OFF Sets device A to OFF − 

ON Sets device A to ON − 

6F3B0253 


Operand 



A Device √ √ √ 

Example 

Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON. 

X000 

Y025 




Expression 

Input 

A 

Forced coil 

Function 

Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained. 



OFF No operation − 

ON No operation − 


6F3B0253 

Operand 




Example 

Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state. 

X000 

Y025 

Set force Reset force Set force Reset force 

Note 

• The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF 

by the programming tool. 


I Inverter 

Expression 

Input I Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned 

OFF. 

This instruction inverts the link state. 



OFF Inverts the input state ON 

ON Inverts the input state OFF 

Operand 


Example 

Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON. 

X000 

Y022 




( I ) Invert coil 

Expression 

A 

Input ( I ) 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to 

OFF. This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the device A. 



OFF Sets device A to ON − 

ON Sets device A to OFF − 

Operand 




Example 

Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON. 

X000 

Y025 


P Positive pulse contact 

Expression 

A 

Input P Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at 

this scan), the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON. 




ON State of device A is OFF OFF 

State of device A is ON A is OFF at last scan ON 

A is ON at last scan OFF 

Operand 



A Device √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON. 

X000 

X003 

R100 


Note 

• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048. 





N Negative pulse contact 

Expression 

A 

Input N Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at 

this scan), the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF. 




ON State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan OFF 

A is ON at last scan ON 

State of device A is ON OFF 

Operand 



A Device √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF. 

X000 

X003 

R100 


Note 




( P ) Positive pulse coil 

Expression 

A 

Input ( P ) 

Function 

When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time. 

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON. 



OFF Sets device A to OFF − 

ON When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON − 

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF − 

6F3B0253 


Operand 




Example 

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON. 

X000 

R100 


Note 






( N ) Negative pulse coil 

Expression 

A 

Input ( N ) 

Function 

When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time. 

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF. 



OFF When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF − 

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON − 

ON Sets device A to OFF − 


6F3B0253 

Operand 




Example 

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF. 

X000 

R100 


Note 




TON ON delay timer 

Expression 

Input ⎯[ A TON B ]⎯ Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The 

elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the 

output and the timer device corresponding to B is turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped) 

When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device 

are turned OFF. 

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767. 



OFF No operation (timer is not updating) OFF 

ON Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) OFF 

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) ON 

Operand 



A Preset time √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 32767 

B Elapsed time √ 

Example 

Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON. 

X000 

Preset value 

T000 

T.000 

Y021 

Preset time (2s) Less than preset time 

Note 

• Time is set in 10 ms units for; 

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s) 

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s) 




• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or 

SS) with the same timer register are not 

allowed. 




TOF OFF delay timer 

Expression 

Input ⎯[ A TOF B ]⎯ Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the 

timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is 

started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input 

came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped) 




OFF Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON 

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) OFF 

ON No operation (timer is not updating) ON 

Operand 



A Preset time √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 32767 


Example 

Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF. 

X000 

Preset value 

T002 

T.002 

Y021 

Preset time (1 s) Less than preset time 

Note 









allowed. 


SS Single shot timer 

Expression 

Input ⎯[ A SS B ]⎯ Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the 

timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B. 

When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device 

are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped) 




OFF Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON 


ON Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON 


Operand 



A Preset time √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 32767 


Example 

Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON. 

X000 

Preset value 

T003 

T.003 

Y021 

Preset time (1 s) Preset time (1 s) 

Note 









allowed. 




CNT Counter 

Expression 

Count input C CNT Q Output 

Enable input E A B 


6F3B0253 

Function 

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from 

OFF to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the 

set value A, the output and the counter device corresponding to B are turned ON. When the enable 

input comes OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF. 



Enable 

input 

Operation Output 

OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0) OFF 

ON Count value (B) < set value (A) OFF 

Count value (B) ≥ set value (A) ON 

Operand 



A Set value √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 65535 

B Count value √ 

Example 

X001 

X002 

C010 

C.010 

Y021 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 

2 

3 

Note 

• No transitional contact is required for the 

count input. The count input rising edge is 

detected by this instruction. 

• For the count input, direct linking to a 

connecting point is not allowed. In this 

case, insert a dummy contact (always ON 

= S04F, etc.) just before the input. 

Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074. 

• Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with 


MCS 

MCR 

Expression 

Input [ MCS ] 

Master control set / reset 

[ MCR ] 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state 

of left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF. 


MCS 

input 


OFF Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR − 

ON Ordinary operation − 

Operand 


Example 

When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and 

X002. 

Equivalent circuit 

X000 

X001 Y021 

X002 Y022 

Note 

• MCS and MCR must be used as a pair. 

• Nesting is not allowed. 




JCS 

JCR 

Expression 

Input [ JCS ] 

Jump control set / reset 

[ JCR ] 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When 

the JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed. 


JCS 

input 

OFF Ordinary operation 

ON Skips until JCR 

Operand 


Example 


When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state 

regardless of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state. 

Note 

• JCS and JCR must be used as a pair. 

• Nesting is not allowed. 


END End 

Expression 

[ END ] 

6F3B0253 


Function 

Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not 

executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program. 



Operand 


Example 

Note 

• For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program. 

• Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used 

steps. 




FUN 018 MOV Data transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A MOV B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B. 



OFF No execution OFF 

ON Execution ON 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 1 (constant to register) 

When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON. 

Example 2 (register to register) 

When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30 

is 500, the data 500 is stored in RW45. 

Example 3 (index modification) 

When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and 

the data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10. 


FUN 019 DMOV Double-word data transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A MOV B+1⋅B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1⋅A is stored in double-word register 

B+1⋅B. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is stored in RW17⋅RW16 and the 

output is turned ON. If D0101⋅D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17⋅RW16. 




FUN 020 NOT Invert transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A NOT B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned 

ON. If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW30 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 

4 3 2 1 

Bit-invert 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

D0200 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 

B C D E 


FUN 022 XCHG Data exchange 

Expression 

Input −[ A XCHG B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged. 





6F3B0253 


Operand 



A Operation data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Operation data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is 

23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows. 

RW23 23456 RW23 291 

D0100 291 D0100 23456 

Before operation After operation 




FUN 024 TINZ Table initialize 

Expression 

Input −[ A TINZ (n) B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B. 

The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

n Table size 1 - 1024 

B Start of 

destination 

√ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to 

D0299) and the output is turned ON. 

Constant 0 D0200 0 

D0201 0 

D0202 0 100 registers 

D0299 0 


FUN 025 TMOV Table transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A TMOV (n) B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting 

with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words. 





Operand 



A Start of source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Start of 

destination 

√ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to 

D1009, and the output is turned ON. 

D0500 1111 D1000 1111 

D0501 2222 D1001 2222 

D0502 3333 Block transfer D1002 3333 10 registers 

D0509 12345 D1009 12345 

Note 

• The source and destination tables can be overlapped. 




FUN 026 TNOT Table invert transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A TNOT (n) B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n 

registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Start of source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Start of 

destination 

√ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to 

D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON. 

D0600 H00FF D0865 HFF00 

D0601 H0000 Bit-invert D0866 HFFFF 

D0602 H1234 and transfer D0867 HEDCB 5 registers 

D0603 H5555 D0868 HAAAA 

D0604 H89AB D0869 H7654 

Note 

• The source and destination tables can be overlapped. 


FUN 027 + Addition 

Expression 

Input −[ A + B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C. 

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is 

turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the 

output is turned ON. 




ON Execution (normal) OFF 

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred) ON 

Operand 



A Augend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Addend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Sum √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is 

stored in D0110. 

If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF. 

D0100 12345 

Constant 1000 

+ D0110 13345 R010 is OFF 

If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in 

D0110, and R010 is turned ON. 

D0100 32700 Overflow 

+ D0110 32767 R010 is ON 

Constant 1000 




FUN 028 − Subtraction 

Expression 

Input −[ A − B → C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C. 

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is 

turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the 







Operand 



A Minuend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Subtrahend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Difference √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result 

is stored in RW50. 

If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF. 

D0200 15000 

Constant 2500 

− RW50 12500 R010 is OFF 

If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is 

stored in RW50, and R010 is turned ON. 

D0100 -31000 Underflow 

− RW50 -32768 R010 is ON 

Constant 2500 


FUN 029 ∗ Multiplication 

Expression 

Input −[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in 






Operand 



A Multiplicand √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Multiplier √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Product √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is 

stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in 

D0100). 

If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in 

D0101⋅D0100. 

D0050 1500 

RW05 20 

× D0101⋅D0100 30000 

D0101 H0000 (upper 16-bit) 

D0100 H7530 (lower 16-bit) 




FUN 030 / Division 

Expression 

Input −[ A / B → C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and 

the remainder in C+1. 


Input Operation Output ERF 

OFF No execution OFF − 

ON Normal execution (B ≠ 0) ON − 

No execution (B = 0) OFF Set 

Operand 



A Dividend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Divisor √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Quotient √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is 

stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28. 

If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored 

in RW28. 

RW22 2894 

÷ RW27 8 (quotient) 

Constant 325 RW28 294 (remainder) 

Note 

• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON. 

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. �[ RST S051 ] �. 

• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored. 

• If operand A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in 

C+1. 


FUN 031 D+ Double-word addition 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are added, and the result is 

stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647. 

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and 

the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value 

-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Augend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Addend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Sum √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the data of D0011⋅D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the 

result is stored in D0101⋅D0100. 

If the data of D0011⋅D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101⋅D0100, and R010 

is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow) 

D0011⋅D0010 300000 

Constant 100000 

+ D0101⋅D0100 400000 R010 is OFF 




FUN 032 D− Double-word subtraction 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D− B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1⋅B is subtracted from A+1⋅A, and the result is 

stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647. 

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and 

the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value 

-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Minuend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Subtrahend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Difference √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25⋅RW24 is subtracted from the double-word 

data of D0101⋅D0100, and the result is stored in D0103⋅D0102. 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25⋅RW24 is 80000, the result 

1500000 is stored in D0103⋅D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow) 

D0101⋅D0100 1580000 

RW25⋅RW24 80000 

− D0103⋅D0102 1500000 R010 is OFF 


FUN 035 +C Addition with carry 

Expression 

Input −[ A +C B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is 

stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater 

than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition. 


Input Operation Output CF 


ON Execution Normal No carry OFF Reset 

Carry occurred OFF Set 

Overflow / No carry ON Reset 

underflow Carry occurred ON Set 

Operand 



A Augend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Addend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Sum √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101⋅D0100 and RW21⋅RW20 are 

added, and the result is stored in D0201⋅D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry 

flag before starting the calculation. 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 12345678 and RW21⋅RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is 

stored in D0201⋅D0200. 

D0101⋅D0100 12345678 

RW21⋅RW20 54322 

+ D0201⋅D0200 12400000 




FUN 036 -C Subtraction with carry 

Expression 

Input −[ A -C B → C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the 

result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is 

greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON. 

This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction. 




ON Execution Normal No borrow OFF Reset 

Borrow occurred OFF Set 

Overflow / No borrow ON Reset 

underflow Borrow occurred ON Set 

Operand 



A Minuend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Subtrahend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Difference √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23⋅RW22 is subtracted from the data 

of D0201⋅D0200, and the result is stored in D0211⋅D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset 

the carry flag before starting the calculation. 

If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 12345678 and RW23⋅RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is 

stored in D0211⋅D0210. 

D0201⋅D0200 12345678 

RW23⋅RW22 12340000 

- D0211⋅D0210 5678 


FUN 039 U∗ Unsigned multiplication 

Expression 

Input −[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in 

double-length register C+1⋅C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data) 





Operand 



A Multiplicand √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Multiplier √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Product √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is 

stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in 

D0100). 

If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in 

D0101⋅D0100. 

D0050 52500 

RW05 30 

× D0101⋅D0100 1575000 

Note 

• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer. 




FUN 040 U/ Unsigned division 

Expression 

Input −[ A U/ B → C ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the 

quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. 

The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data) 







6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Dividend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Divisor √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Quotient √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is 

stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051. 

If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is 


D0030 54321 

÷ RW27 181 (quotient) 

Constant 300 RW28 21 (remainder) 

Note 


The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−. 

• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored. 



FUN 041 DIV Unsigned double/single division 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient 

is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1⋅A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data 

range of B and C is 0 to 65535. 

If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in 

C+1, and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 





Overflow (B ≠ 0) ON Set 


Operand 



A Dividend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Divisor √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Quotient √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201⋅D0200 is divided by the constant data 

4000, and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001. 

If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder 

257 is stored in D1001. 

D0201⋅D0200 332257 

÷ D1000 83 (quotient) 

Constant 4000 D1001 257 (remainder) 

Note 


The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−. 





FUN 043 +1 Increment 

Expression 

Input −[ +1 A ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 




Example 

At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and 


If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution. 

D0050 D0050 

750 + 1 751 

Note 

• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the 

execution, it will be -32768 after the execution. 


FUN 045 -1 Decrement 

Expression 

Input −[ -1 A ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A. 





6F3B0253 


Operand 




Example 

At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and 


If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution. 

D0050 D0050 

1022 - 1 1021 

Note 

• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the 

execution, it will be 32767 after the execution. 




FUN 048 AND AND 

Expression 

Input −[ A AND B → C ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C AND √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant 

data HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030. 

If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW12 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 

3 4 5 6 

AND 

Constant 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

F F 0 0 

D0030 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

3 4 0 0 


FUN 050 OR OR 

Expression 

Input −[ A OR B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C OR √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the 

result is stored in D0031. 

If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW13 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 

5 6 7 8 

OR 

RW20 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 

4 3 2 1 

D0031 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 

5 7 7 9 




FUN 052 EOR Exclusive OR 

Expression 

Input −[ A EOR B → C ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds exclusive OR of A and B, and stores the result in C. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Exclusive OR √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and 

the result is stored in D1000. 

If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

D1000 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 

5 6 7 8 

Exclusive OR 

D0300 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 

4 3 2 1 

D1000 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 

1 5 5 9 


FUN 056 MAVE Moving average 

Expression 

Input −[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latest n scan’s register A 

data, and stores it in C. The allowable range of n is 1 to 64. 

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. 

The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer. 





Operand 



A Input data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

n Data size 1 - 64 

B Start of table √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Output data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average 

value of them is calculated and stored in D0010. 

D0011 is used as internal work data. 

XW04 D0010 

1st scan 1000 200 = (1000) / 5 

2nd scan 1005 401 = (1000 + 1005) / 5 

3rd scan 1009 603 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5 

4th scan 1012 805 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5 

5th scan 1007 1006 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5 

6th scan 1004 1007 = (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5 

7th scan 998 1006 = (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5 

8th scan 994 1003 = (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5 




FUN 061 DFL Digital Filter 

Expression 

Input −[ A DFL B → C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for 

input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C. 

yn = ( 1− FL) × xn+ FL× yn 

− 1 

Here; xn is input data specified by A 

FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999) 

yn is output data to be stored in C 

yn-1 is output data at last scan 

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. C+1 is used for internal work data. 




ON Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to 

9999) 

ON 

Operand 



A Input data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Filter constant √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Output data √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data) 

When D0100 value is small 

XW04 

D0110 

Time 

When D0100 value is large 

XW04 

D0110 


Time

FUN 062 HTOA Hex to ASCII conversion 

Expression 

Input −[ A HTOA (n) B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII 

characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of 

destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range of n is 1 to 32. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and 

stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200. 

F 0 F 8 7 0 

D0100 H0123 D0220 “1” (H31) “0” (H30) 

D0101 H4567 Converted D0221 “3” (H33) “2” (H32) 

D0102 H89AB D0222 “5” (H35) “4” (H34) 

D0103 HCDEF D0223 “7” (H37) “6” (H36) 

D0224 “9” (H39) “8” (H38) 

D0225 “B” (H42) “A” (H41) 

D0226 “D” (H44) “C” (H43) 

D0227 “F” (H46) “E” (H45) 

Note 

• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise, 

boundary error will occur. 




FUN 063 ATOH ASCII to Hex conversion 

Expression 

Input −[ A ATOH (n) B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into 

hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost 

digit of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table 

is “0” (H30) to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range of n is 1 to 64. 




ON Normal execution ON − 

Conversion data error (no execution) OFF Set 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 



Example 

When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted 

into hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040. 

F 8 7 0 F 0 

D0300 “1” (H31) “0” (H30) RW040 H0123 

D0301 “3” (H33) “2” (H32) Converted RW041 H4567 

D0302 “5” (H35) “4” (H34) RW042 H89AB 

D0303 “7” (H37) “6” (H36) RW043 HCDEF 

D0304 “9” (H39) “8” (H38) 

D0305 “B” (H42) “A” (H41) 

D0306 “D” (H44) “C” (H43) 

D0307 “F” (H46) “E” (H45) 

Note 

• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. 

• If n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n. 


FUN 064 TEST Bit test 

Expression 

Input −[ A TEST B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets 

the output to ON. 




ON Execution When the result is not 0 ON 

When the result is 0 OFF 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Test data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if 

the result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to 

R07B is ON.) 

If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW07 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 

4 0 0 8 

AND 

Constant 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

0 F F F 

Result is not 0 

Result 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 R00A comes ON 




FUN 068 SHR1 1 bit shift right 

Expression 

Input −[ SHR1 A ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in 

the left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the 

operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution When LSB = 1 ON Set or reset 

When LSB = 0 OFF Set or reset 

Operand 




Example 

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right. 

The figure below shows an operation example. 

(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW15 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 

CF 

RW15 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 

(Result) 

0 R001 is turned ON 


FUN 069 SHL1 1 bit shift left 

Expression 

Input −[ SHL1 A ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in 

the right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the 

operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution When MSB = 1 ON Set or reset 

When MSB = 0 OFF Set or reset 

Operand 




Example 

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left. 


(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 

R002 is turned ON 0 

RW15 

RW15 (Result) 




FUN 070 SHR n bit shift right 

Expression 

Input −[ A SHR n → B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including 

the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the 

right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

n Shift bits 1 - 16 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the 

result is stored in RW20. 


(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW18 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

RW20 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 

(Result) 

0 R001 is turned OFF 


FUN 071 SHL n bit shift left 

Expression 

Input −[ A SHL n → B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the 

carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left 

most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the 



(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 

R002 is turned OFF 0 

RW18 

RW20 (Result) 




FUN 074 SR Shift register 

Expression 

Data input − D SR Q − Output 

Shift input − S (n) 

Enable input − E A 


6F3B0253 

Function 

While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A, 

1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is 

stored in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). 

When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF. 


Enable 

input 

Operation Output CF 

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table OFF Reset 

ON When the shift input is ON Shift execution Last bit Set or reset 

When the shift input is OFF No execution state − 

Operand 



A Leading device √ √ √ 

n Device size 1 - 64 

Example 

32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register. 

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF) 

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF. 

While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction 

when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the 

leading bit (R100). 

The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F). 


6F3B0253 


The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON) 

CF R11F R11E R11D R11C R103 R102 R101 R100 X008 

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 

R011 is turned OFF 

Note 

• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional 

contact for the shift input to detect the state changing. 

• For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this 

case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input. 

( ) 

D SR Q Not allowed 

S (n) 

E A 

Dummy contact 

( ) 

D SR Q Allowed 

S (n) 

E A 

Shift result 




FUN 075 DSR Bi-directional shift register 

Expression 

Data input − D DSR Q − Output 

Shift input − S (n) 

Enable input − E 

Direction input − L A 


6F3B0253 

Function 

While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with 

A, 1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction 

input (L). 

When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction). 

When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction). 

The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A 

if left shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). 

When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF. 


Enable 

input 

Operation Output CF 

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table OFF Reset 

ON S = ON L = ON Shift left execution Highest bit state Set or reset 

L = OFF Shift right execution Lowest bit state Set or reset 

S = OFF No execution Highest bit state − 

Operand 



A Leading device √ √ √ 

n Device size 1 - 64 

Example 


6F3B0253 


9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register. 

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF) 

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF. 

While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled. 

• When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper 

address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of 

X008 is stored in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest 

bit (R208). 

• When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower 

address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of 

X008 is stored in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest 

bit (R200). 


(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON) 

CF R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200 X008 

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 


(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON) 

X008 R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200 CF 

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 

Shift result 

Shift result 

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 

R012 is turned ON 

Note 

• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional 

contact for the shift input to detect the state changing. 

• For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not 

allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just 

before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074. 




FUN 078 RTR1 1 bit rotate right 

Expression 

Input −[ RTR1 A ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed 

out bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the 

operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 




Example 

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right. 


(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW15 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 

CF 

RW15 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 

(Result) 



FUN 079 RTL1 1 bit rotate left 

Expression 

Input −[ RTL1 A ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed 

out bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the 

operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 




Example 

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left. 


(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 


RW15 

RW15 (Result) 




FUN 080 RTR n bit rotate right 

Expression 

Input −[ A RTR n → B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored 

in B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the 



(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW18 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

RW20 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 

(Result) 

∗ 

∗ 



FUN 081 RTL n bit rotate left 

Expression 

Input −[ A RTL n → B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored 

in B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON. 






Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the 



∗ 

(MSB) (LSB) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 

CF 

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 


RW18 

RW20 (Result) 

∗ 




FUN 090 MPX Multiplexer 

Expression 

Input −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting 

with A, is transferred to C. 




ON Normal execution OFF 

Pointer over (no execution) ON 

Operand 



A Start of table √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Pointer √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 63 

C Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table 

D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005. 

If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005. 

Source table Pointer Destination 

D0500 0 D0005 12345 

D0501 1 

D0507 12345 7 

D0508 8 

D0509 9 

Note 

• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer 

is not executed and the output comes ON. 

• The table must be within the effective range of the register address. 


FUN 091 DPX Demultiplexer 

Expression 

Input −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated by B in the 

table, size n starting with C. 




ON Normal execution OFF 

Pointer over (no execution) ON 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Pointer √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 63 

C Start of table √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by 

RW30 in the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size). 

If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508. 

Source Destination table Pointer 

XW04 3210 D0500 0 

D0501 1 

D0507 7 

D0508 3210 8 

D0509 9 

Note 

• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer 

is not executed and the output comes ON. 

• The table must be within the effective range of the register address. 




FUN 096 > Greater than 

Expression 

Input −[ A > B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the 





ON Execution A > B ON 

A ≤ B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data 

of D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON. 

D0125 3000 > Constant 2500 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF. 

D0125 -100 ≤ Constant 2500 R020 is OFF 

Note 

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767). 


FUN 097 >= Greater than or equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A >= B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or 

equal to B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A ≥ B ON 

A 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of 

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true. 

Consequently, R020 is turned ON. 

D0125 3000 ≥ D0020 3000 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false. 

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF. 

D0125 -1500 < D0020 0 R020 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 098 = Equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A = B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the 





ON Execution A = B ON 

A ≠ B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON. 



D0125 3000 = D0030 3000 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false. 


D0125 -1500 ≠ D0030 0 R020 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 099 Not equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the 





ON Execution A ≠ B ON 

A = B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of 

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON. 


D0125 10 ≠ Constant 0 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF. 

D0125 0 = Constant 0 R020 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 100 < Less than 

Expression 

Input −[ A 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the 





ON Execution A 

A ≥ B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0125 is 10 and that of D0040 is 15, the comparison result is true. Consequently, 

R020 is turned ON. 

D0125 10 < D0040 15 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is 0 and that of D0040 is -50, the comparison result is false. 


D0125 0 ≥ D0040 0 R020 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 101


FUN 102 D> Double-word greater than 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is 

greater than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B ON 

A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and 

if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is 

turned ON. 

D0101⋅D0100 250000 > Constant 200000 R014 is ON 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is 

turned OFF. 

D0101⋅D0100 -100 ≤ Constant 200000 R014 is OFF 

Note 

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647). 


FUN 103 D>= Double-word greater than or equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 


greater than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B ON 

A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word 

data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of 

D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON. 

D0101⋅D0100 250000 ≥ D0251⋅D0250 200000 R014 is ON 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF. 

D0101⋅D0100 -100 < D0251⋅D0250 0 R014 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 104 D= Double-word equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]− Output 

Function 


equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B ON 

A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is equal to the data of D0251⋅D0250, 

R014 is turned ON. 


D0101⋅D0100 250000 = D0251⋅D0250 250000 R014 is ON 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF. 

D0101⋅D0100 -100 ≠ D0251⋅D0250 0 R014 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 105 D Double-word not equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D B+1⋅B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is not 

equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B ON 

A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is not equal to the data of 

D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON. 


D0101⋅D0100 250000 ≠ D0251⋅D0250 250000 R014 is ON 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF. 

D0101⋅D0100 -100 = D0251⋅D0250 -100 R014 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 106 D< Double-word less than 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]− Output 

Function 


less than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B ON 

A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and 

if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON. 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON. 

D0101⋅D0100 250000 < Constant 427780 R014 is ON 

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF. 

D0101⋅D0100 430000 ≥ Constant 427780 R014 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 107 D Constant 0 R014 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 108 U> Unsigned greater than 

Expression 

Input −[ A U> B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the 





ON Execution A > B ON 

A ≤ B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the 

data of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON. 


D0125 52000 > Constant 40000 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned 

OFF. 

D0125 21000 ≤ Constant 40000 R020 is OFF 

Note 

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535). 


FUN 109 U>= Unsigned greater than or equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A >= B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or 

equal to B, the output is turned ON. 




ON Execution A ≥ B ON 

A 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON. 



D0125 40000 ≥ D0020 40000 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is 15000 and that of D0020 is 20000, the comparison result is false. 


D0125 15000 < D0020 20000 R020 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 110 U= Unsigned equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A U= B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the 





ON Execution A = B ON 

A ≠ B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON. 



D0125 35000 = D0030 35000 R020 is ON 



D0125 1500 ≠ D0030 4000 R020 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 111 U Unsigned not equal 

Expression 

Input −[ A U B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the 





ON Execution A ≠ B ON 

A = B OFF 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of 

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON. 


D0125 41000 ≠ Constant 0 R020 is ON 

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF. 

D0125 0 = Constant 0 R020 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 112 U< Unsigned less than 

Expression 

Input −[ A U

Function 

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the 





ON Execution A 

A ≥ B OFF 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Compared 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

data 

B Reference 

data 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON. 



D0125 43000 < D0040 45000 R020 is ON 



D0125 50000 ≥ D0040 50000 R020 is OFF 

Note 



FUN 113 U Constant 35000 R020 is OFF 

Note 





FUN 114 SET Device/register set 

Expression 

Input −[ SET A ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the 

register A if A is a register. 





Operand 


A Device or 

register 

Example 1 (device set) 


√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes 

OFF. 

Example 2 (register set) 

When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON) 

The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF. 


FUN 115 RST Device/register reset 

Expression 

Input −[ RST A ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF if A is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the 

register A if A is a register. 





Operand 


A Device or 

register 

Example 1 (device reset) 


√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes 

OFF. 

Example 2 (register reset) 

When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF) 

The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF. 




FUN 118 SETC Set carry 

Expression 

Input −[ SETC ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON. 




ON Execution ON Set 

Operand 


Example 

When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON. 


6F3B0253 


FUN 119 RSTC Reset carry 

Expression 

Input −[ RSTC ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF. 




ON Execution ON Reset 

Operand 


Example 

When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF. 

6F3B0253 





FUN 120 ENC Encode 

Expression 

Input −[ A ENC (n) B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit 

table, size 2 n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B. 





There is no ON bit (no execution) OFF Set 

Operand 





B Encode result √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

2 5 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table. 

When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the 

position is stored in D0010. 

The following figure shows an operation example. 

RW06 RW05 

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3 2 1 0 

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 

D0010 26 

Note 

• If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 


FUN 121 DEC Decode 

Expression 

Input −[ A DEC (n) B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A 

to ON in the bit table, size 2 n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF. 





Operand 



A Decode source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


B Start of table √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

2 5 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table. 

When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to 

ON, and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF. 


F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

D0011 1 1 0 0 0 

Ignored H18 (=24) 

Sets ON 

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3 2 1 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

RW06 RW05 




FUN 122 BC Bit count 

Expression 

Input −[ A BC B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result 

in B. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Count data √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result 

is stored in D0102. 


F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW032 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 

Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

D0102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 

The result data (7) is stored in binary 


FUN 128 CALL Subroutine call 

Expression 

Input −[ CALL N. n ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine number n. 





6F3B0253 


Operand 


n Subroutine 

number 

Example 


√ (Note) 

When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned 

from the subroutine, the output is turned ON. 

Main program Subroutine 

| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)] 

[ RET ] 

Note 

• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S). 

• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137). 

• In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be 

used in a subroutine. 

• In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels) 

• The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the 

same subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program. 




FUN 129 RET Subroutine return 

Expression 

⎟−−[ RET ]−⎢ 

Function 

This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this 

instruction, it is returned to the original CALL instruction. 



- Execution - 

Operand 


Example 


| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)] 


[ RET ] 

Note 

• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137). 

• The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’. 

• The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail. 

6F3B0253 


FUN 132 FOR FOR (FOR-NEXT loop) 

Expression 

Input −[ FOR n ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times 

repeatedly in a scan. 

When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once) 



OFF No repetition OFF 

ON Repetition ON 

Operand 


n Repetition 

times 

Example 


√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 1 - 32767 

This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan. 

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a 

scan. 

R005 

| | [ FOR 30 ] 

[ NEXT ] 

Executed 30 times in a scan when 

R005 is ON. 




FUN 133 NEXT NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop) 

Expression 

Input −[ NEXT ]− Output 

Function 

This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop. 

If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the 

next instruction. 



OFF Forcibly breaks the repetition OFF 

ON Repetition ON 

Operand 


Example 


6F3B0253 

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a 

scan. In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to 

D0029 are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer) 

Note 

• The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one. 

• Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a 

FOR-NEXT loop. 

• The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung. 

• The following connection is not allowed. 

| | [ FOR n ] | | [ NEXT ] 

| | | | 


FUN 137 SUBR Subroutine entry 

Expression 

⎟−[ SUBR (n) ]−−⎢ 

Function 

This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine. 



- Execution - 

6F3B0253 


Operand 


n Subroutine 

number 

Example 


The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated. 


| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)] 

[ RET ] 

Note 

• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S). 

• Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129). 

• The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’. 

• Nesting of subroutine is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a 

subroutine. 

• No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction. 

√ (Note) 




FUN 140 EI Enable interrupt 

Expression 

Input −[ EI ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation, 

i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs. 





Operand 


Example 

In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables 

the interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption 

between each instructions. 

Note 

• Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141). 

• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting 

and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed. 

• The EI instruction can be used only in the main program. 


FUN 141 DI Disable interrupt 

Expression 

Input −[ DI ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation, 

i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs. 





Operand 


Example 

In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000 

is OFF. 

Note 

• Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140). 

• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting 

and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed. 

• The DI instruction can be used only in the main program. 




FUN 142 IRET Interrupt return 

Expression 

⎟−−[ IRET ]−⎢ 


6F3B0253 

Function 

This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this 

instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine). 



- Execution - 

Operand 


Example 

An interrupt program 

(Timer interrupt, 

I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4) 

Note 

• The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program. 

• There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program. 


FUN 143 WDT Watchdog timer reset 

Expression 

Input −[ WDT n ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms. 

Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction 

can be used to extend the detection time. 





Operand 



n Extend time 1 - 100 

Example 

When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no 

effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms. 

Normal detection point Extended point 

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 (ms) 

Scan 

WDT instruction 

execution 

Extended by 200 ms 

Note 

• As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the 

T1/T1S, it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n. 




FUN 144 STIZ Step sequence initialize 

Expression 

Input −[ STIZ (n) A ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON. 

This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to 

describe a sequential operation. 




ON Execution at the rising edge of the input ON 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



n Size of step 

sequence 

1 - 64 

A Start device √ 

Example 

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 

to R409) are reset to OFF. 

This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400. 

R409 R408 R407 R406 R405 R404 R403 R402 R401 R400 

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 

10 devices starting with R400 

Note 

• The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to 

configure the step sequence. 

• The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON. 


FUN 145 STIN Step sequence input 

Expression 

Input −[ STIN A ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON. 




ON When A is ON ON 

When A is OFF OFF 

6F3B0253 


Operand 



A Step device √ 

Example 

The following sequential operation is performed. 

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 

to R409) are reset to OFF. 

When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON. 

When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON. 

R020 

X004 

X005 

R022 

R400 

R401 

R402 




FUN 146 STOT Step sequence output 

Expression 

Input −[ STOT A ]−⎢ 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same 

rung are reset to OFF. 



OFF No execution - 

ON Execution - 

Operand 



A Step device √ 

Example 

See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction. 

Note 

• The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence. 

• Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences. 

• Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop 

or convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung) 

• To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows. 

This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only. 

[ STIN A ] | | [ STOT B ] [ STIN A ] | | [ STOT B ] 

| | [ STOT C ] [ STIN A ] | | [ STOT C ] 

Not allowed Available 


FUN 147 F/F Flip-flop 

Expression 

Set input − S F/F Q − Output 

Reset input − R A 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is 

reset to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both 

the set and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF. 

The state of the output is the same as the device A. 


Set Reset 


input input 

OFF OFF No execution (A remains previous state) Same 

ON Resets A to OFF as A 

ON OFF Sets A to ON 

ON Resets A to OFF 

Operand 




Example 

When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are 

ON, R10E is reset to OFF. 

An example timing diagram is shown below. 

X003 

X004 

R10E 

Note 

• For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy 

contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074. 




FUN 149 U/D Up-down counter 

Expression 

Direction input − U U/D Q − Output 

Count input − C 

Enable input − E A 


6F3B0253 

Function 

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from 

OFF to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction 

input. The count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535. 

• Up count when the direction input is ON 

• Down count when the direction input is OFF 

When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0. 


Enable 

input 


OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0) OFF 

ON Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535) OFF 

Count value is limit value and count input is ON ON 

Operand 



A Count value √ 

Example 

X005 

X006 

R010 

C005 

C.005 

1 

2 

3 2 

1 

1 

2 3 

Note 

• The transitional contact is required for 

the count input. Otherwise, counting is 

executed every scan during X005 is ON 

in this example. 

• For the direction input and the count 

input, direct linking to a connecting point 

is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift 

register FUN 074. 


FUN 154 CLND Set calendar 

Expression 

Input −[ A CLND ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers 

starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the 




OFF No operation OFF 

ON Execution (data is valid)) OFF 

No execution (data is not valid) ON 

Operand 




Example 

When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the 

output is OFF (R0031 is OFF). 

If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is 

turned ON (R0031 comes ON). 

F 8 7 0 Allowable data range (2-digit BCD) 

D0050 H00 Year H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089) 

D0051 H00 Month H01 to H12 

D0052 H00 Day H01 to H31 Calendar 

D0053 H00 Hour H00 to H23 LSI 

D0054 H00 Minute H00 to H59 

D0055 H00 Second H00 to H59 

Note 

• The day of the week is automatically. 




FUN 155 CLDS Calendar operation 

Expression 

Input −[ A CLDS B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with 

A from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B. 

If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is 

turned ON. 




ON Execution (data is valid)) OFF 

No execution (data is not valid) ON 

Operand 



A Subtrahend √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Result √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from 

the current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105. 

In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid 

data, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON). 

Current date & time 

F 0 F 0 

H0098 D0050 H0097 D0100 H0000 (Year) 

H0001 D0051 H0010 D0101 H0003 (Month) 

H0015 minus D0052 H0010 D0102 H0007 (Day) 

H0017 D0053 H0015 D0103 H0001 (Hour) 

H0000 D0054 H0030 D0104 H0030 (Minute) 

H0000 D0055 H0000 D0105 H0000 (Second) 

Note 

• Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A. 

• In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days. 


FUN 156 PID3 Pre-derivative real PID 

Expression 

Input −[ A PID3 B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feedback 

control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features. 

• For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency 

noise and to expand the stable application range, 

• Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV, by using digital PID 

algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID. 

• Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction. 

• Digital filter is available for PV. 

• Direct / reverse operation is selectable. 



OFF Initialization OFF 

ON Execute PID every setting interval ON when 

execution 

Operand 


X Y R S T. C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K 

A Top of input data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Top of parameter √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Top of output data √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Input data Control parameter Output data 

A Process input value PVC B Proportional gain KP C Manipulation value MV 

A+1 A-mode set value ASV B+1 Integral time TI C+1 Last error en-1 

A+2 C-mode set value CSV B+2 Derivative time TD C+2 Last derivative value Dn-1 

A+3 M-mode MV input MMV B+3 Dead-band GP C+3 Last PV PVn-1 

A+4 MV tracking input TMV B+4 A-mode initial SV ISV C+4 Last SV SVn-1 

A+5 Mode setting MODE B+5 Input filter constant FT C+5 Integral remainder Ir 

B+6 ASV differential limit DSV C+6 Derivative remainder Dr 

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV C+7 Internal MV MVn 

A-mode: Auto mode B+8 Initial status STS C+8 Internal counter C 

C-mode: Cascade mode B+9 MV upper limit MH C+9 Control interval ∆t 

M-mode: Manual mode B+10 MV lower limit ML 

B+11 MV differential limit DMV 

B+12 Control interval setting n 




Control block diagram 


Integral 

1 

ASV 

DSV 

Differential 

Auto 

mode 

SVn + 

Gap 

en 

TI⋅s 

∆In 

Proportional 

∆Pn 

1 

+ 

+ KP 

∆MVn 

MVn 

MVS H/L DMV 

CSV 

- 

- 

Cascade 

Derivative 

mode 

TD⋅s 

1+η⋅TD⋅s 

∆Dn 

MMV 

DMMV 

Differential limit 

PVn 

(η = 0.1) 

1 

1+T⋅s 

Digtal filter 

Integral 

control 

PVC 

MVS: Velocity → Position 

MVn = MVn-1 ± ∆MVn 

H/L: Upper / lower limit 

DMV: Differential limit 

MVCn 

Manual 

mode 

6F3B0253 

Integral action control: 

When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action 

is stopped. 

Velocity → Position conversion: 

In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased. → MVn = MVn-1 - ∆Mvn 

In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased. → MVn = MVn-1 + ∆MVn 

Gap (dead-band) operation: 

Algorithm 

Digital filter: 

PVn = ( −FT) ⋅ PVC + FT ⋅PVn − 

Here, 

Error e 

1 1 

0. 000 ≤FT ≤ 0. 999 

GP (%) GP (%) 

SV - PV 


MV

PID algorithm: 

∆MVn= KP ⋅ ( ∆Pn+ ∆In+ ∆Dn) 

MV = MV − 1 ± ∆MV 

Here, 

n n n 

∆P = e −e 

Parameter details 

n n n − 1 

e = SV −PV 

n n n 

en⋅ ∆t+ 

Ir 

∆In 

= 

TI 

TD⋅( PVn − 1−PVn) −∆t⋅ Dn − 1+ 

Dr 

∆Dn 

= 

∆t+ 

η⋅TD 

Dn = Dn − 1 + ∆Dn 

η = 01 . (Fixed) 

(If GP ≠ 0, Gap is applied) 

(If TI = 0, then ∆In = 0) 

A Process input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000 

A+1 Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000 

A+2 Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000 

A+3 Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500 

A+4 MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500 

A+5 Mode setting MODE 

F C 8 4 0 

Operation mode 

00 : Manual mode 

01 : Auto mode 

10 : Cascade mode 

11 : (Reserve) 

Tracking designation 

0 : No 

1 : Yes 

B Proportional gain KP (0.00 to 327.67) Data range: 0 to 32767 

B+1 Integral time TI (0.000 to 32.767 min., ∆In=0 if TI =0) Data range: 0 to 32767 

B+2 Derivative time TD (0.000 to 32.767 min.) Data range: 0 to 32767 

B+3 Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %) Data range: 0 to 1000 

B+4 Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000 

B+5 Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999) Data range: 0 to 999 

B+6 ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000 

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000 

6F3B0253 





B+8 Initial status STS 

F C 8 4 0 


Initial operation mode 

00 : Manual mode 

01 : Auto mode 

10 : Cascade mode 

11 : (Reserve) 

Direct / reverse selection 

0 : Direct 

1 : Reverse 

B+9 MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500 

B+10 MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500 

B+11 MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000 

B+12 Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times) Data range: 1 to 32767 

Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval ∆t = n × constant scan interval 

(It is treated as n = 1 when n ≤ 0) 

C Manipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500 

C+1 

: Internal work area 

C+9 

Operation 

1. When the instruction input is OFF: 

Initializes the PID3 instruction. 

Operation mode is set as specified by B+8. A+5 bit 0, 1 ← B+8 bit 0, 1 

Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4. ASV ← ISV 

Manual mode MV is set as current MV. MMV ← MV 

Internal calculation data is initialized. 

MV remains unchanged. 

2. When the instruction input is ON: 

Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are 

available according to the setting of A+5. 

6F3B0253 

• Auto mode 

This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value. 

Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV 

are effective. 

Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value 

MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV) 


6F3B0253 


• Manual mode 

In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV. 

MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective. 

When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV. 

• Cascade mode 

This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value. 

Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower 

limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective. 

Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation 

value MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV) 

And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is 

over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV ← CSV) 

• MV tracking 

This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation ( A+5 bit 2) is ON, 

tracking input TMV is directly output as MV. 

Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective. 

When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV. 

Note 

• PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program. 

• PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected 

in the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments. 

• The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation 

value MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this 

purpose, the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient. 




FUN 160 UL Upper limit 

Expression 

Input −[ A UL B → C ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B) 

If A ≤ B, then C = A. 

If A > B, then C = B. 




ON Execution: not limited (A ≤ B) OFF 

Execution: limited (A > B) ON 


6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Operation data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Upper limit √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of 

D1200, and the result is stored in RW021. 

C 

(RW021) Upper limit B (D1200) 

A (RW018) 

When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF. 

When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 

is ON. 

Note 



FUN 161 LL Lower limit 

Expression 

Input −[ A LL B → C ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B) 

If A ≥ B, then C = A. 

If A < B, then C = B. 




ON Execution: not limited (A ≥ B) OFF 

Execution: limited (A < B) ON 

6F3B0253 


Operand 



A Operation data √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Lower limit √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of 

D1220, and the result is stored in RW022. 

Lower limit B (D1220) 

C 

(RW022) 

A (RW019) 

When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF. 

When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041 

is ON. 

Note 





FUN 162 MAX Maximum value 

Expression 

Input −[ A MAX (n) B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of size n 

words starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of 

the maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64. 





Operand 





B Result √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10 

words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501. 

Pointer 

D0200 100 0 

D0201 10000 1 

D0202 -1000 2 

D0203 10 3 

D0204 0 4 

D0205 200 5 

D0206 -300 6 

D0207 20000 7 D0500 20000 (Maximum value) 

D0208 -30 8 D0501 7 (Pointer) 

D0209 20 9 

Note 


• If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored. 

• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded. 


FUN 163 MIN Minimum value 

Expression 

Input −[ A MIN (n) B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of size n 

words starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of 

the minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64. 





Operand 





B Result √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10 

words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511. 

Pointer 

D0200 100 0 

D0201 10000 1 

D0202 -1000 2 D0510 -1000 (Minimum value) 

D0203 10 3 D0511 2 (Pointer) 

D0204 0 4 

D0205 200 5 

D0206 -300 6 

D0207 20000 7 

D0208 -30 8 

D0209 20 9 

Note 


• If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored. 

• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded. 




FUN 164 AVE Average value 

Expression 

Input −[ A AVE (n) B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in the n 

registers starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table size n 

is 1 to 64. 





Operand 





B Result √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209 

(10 words), and the average value is stored in D0520. 

D0200 100 

D0201 10000 

D0202 -1000 

D0203 10 

D0204 0 D0520 2900 (Average value) 

D0205 200 

D0206 -300 

D0207 20000 

D0208 -30 

D0209 20 


FUN 165 FG Function generator 

Expression 

Input −[ A FG (n) B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value f(x) for A as x, and stores it in C. The 

function f(x) is defined by the parameters stored in 2 × n registers starting with B. 





Operand 



A Input value x √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

n Parameter size 1 - 32 

B Start of 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

parameters 

C Function value 

f(x) 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value f(x) for x = XW004, and stores 

the result in D0100. 

The function f(x) is defined by 2 × 4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example, 

these parameters are set at the first scan. 




Parameter table 

4 registers for x parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding f(x) parameters 

D0600 -2000 x1 

D0601 -100 x2 

D0602 100 x3 

D0603 2000 x4 

D0604 -1800 y1 

D0605 -300 y2 

D0606 300 y3 

D0607 1800 y4 

The FG instruction interpolators f(x) value for x based on the n parameters of (xi,yi). 

For example, if XW04 is 1500 (x = 1500), the result 1405 (f(x) = 1405) is stored in D0100. 


-2000 

1405 

y = f(x) 

-2000 

(x1,y1) 

y 

1800 

300 

-100 

100 

-300 

-1800 

6F3B0253 

Note 

• The order of the x parameters should be x1 ≤ x2 ≤ ... ≤ xi ≤ ... ≤ xn. In the above example, the 

data of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600 ≤ D0601 ≤ D0602 ≤ D0603. 

• If x is smaller than x1, y1 is given as f(x). In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in 

D0100 if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000). 

• If x is greater than xn, yn is given as f(x). In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in 

D0100 if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000). 

• The valid data range is -32768 to 32767. 

y 

1800 

300 

-100 

(x3,y3) 

100 

(x2,y2) -300 

2000 

1500 


-1800 

x 

(x4,y4) 

2000 

x

FUN 180 ABS Absolute value 

Expression 

Input −[ A ABS B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121. 

For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121. 

-32767 

12000 

D0121 

32767 

-12000 

0 32767 

RW38 

Note 

• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B. 




FUN 182 NEG 2’s complement 

Expression 

Input −[ A NEG B ]− Output 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B. 






6F3B0253 

Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122. 

For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122. 

2’s complement data is calculated as follows. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW39 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 (4660) 

Bit inverse 

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 (-4661) 

D0122 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 (-4660) 

+ 1 

Note 

• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is 

stored in B. 


FUN 183 DNEG Double-word 2’s complement 

Expression 

Input −[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1⋅A, 

and stores it in B+1⋅B. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 


Example 

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register 

RW41⋅RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151⋅D0150. 

For example, if RW41⋅RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored 

in D0151⋅D0150. 

Note 

• The data range of A+1⋅A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1⋅A is -2147483648, 

the same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1⋅B. 




FUN 185 7SEG 7 segment decode 

Expression 

Input −[ A 7SEG B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data of A into the 7 segment code, 

and stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED. 





Operand 



A Source √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Destination √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and 

the result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10. 

For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

RW15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 (H0009) 

Upper 12 bits are ignored 

RW10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 (H006F) 

0 is stored in upper 8 bits 

7 segment decode 

The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page. 


6F3B0253 


Operand A (lower 4 bits) 7 segment LED Operand B (lower 8 bits) Display 

Hex Binary composition B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

0 0000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 

2 0010 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 

3 0011 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 

4 0100 B0 

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 

5 0101 

B5 

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 

B1 

6 0110 B6 

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 

7 0111 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 

8 1000 B4 B2 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

9 1001 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 

A 1010 

B3 

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 

B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 

C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 

D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 

E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 

F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 




FUN 186 ASC ASCII conversion 

Expression 

Input −[ A ASC B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes, 

and stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum) 





Operand 



A Characters √ 

B Start of 

destination 

√ √ √ √ √ √ 

Example 

When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and 

the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207). 

High Low 

F 8 7 0 

D0200 H42 (B) H41 (A) 

D0201 H44 (D) H43 (C) 

D0202 H46 (F) H45 (E) 

D0203 H48 (H) H47 (G) 

D0204 H4A (J) H49 (I) 

D0205 H4C (L) H4B (K) 

D0206 H4E (N) H4D (M) 

D0207 

Previous data is remained 

Note 

• Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above 

example, 14 characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are 

stored in 7 registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged. 


FUN 188 BIN Binary conversion 

Expression 

Input −[ A BIN B ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data of A into binary, and stores 

in B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not 

executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 





BCD data error OFF Set 

Operand 



A Source (BCD) √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ H0000 - 

B Destination 

(Binary) 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

H9999 

When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is 


For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127. 

RW28 BCD to Binary D0127 

H1234 1234 

Note 

• If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed 

and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 




FUN 190 BCD BCD conversion 

Expression 

Input −[ A BCD B ]− Output 


6F3B0253 

Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the 

data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error 

flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 





Binary data error OFF Set 

Operand 



A Source 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 0 - 9999 

(Binary) 

B Destination 

(BCD) 

Example 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in 

RW22. 

For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22. 

D0211 Binary to BCD RW22 

5432 H5432 

Note 

• If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the 

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. 


FUN 235 I/O Direct I/O 

Expression 

Input −[ I/O (n) A ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output 

(YW) registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A. 

• For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit 

• For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit 





Operand 



n Register size 1 - 32 

A Start of 

registers 

√ √ 

Example 

When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated 

immediately. 

XW00 Input 

XW01 circuit 

YW02 Output 

YW03 circuit 





6F3B0253 

Note 

• In the T1-16S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction. 

Input on basic unit Output on basic unit I/O module 

X000 - X007 Y020 - Y027 Not effective 

• The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program. 

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed 

in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions. 


FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer 

Expression 

Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output 

6F3B0253 


Function 

When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly 

designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The 

transfer size (number of words) is designated by B. 

The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM) 

Data transfer between the following objects are available. 

• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ EEPROM (D register) 

• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ T1S RS-485 port (T1S only) 





When error is occurred (see Note) ON Set 

Operand 



A Source 

parameter 

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Transfer size √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C Destination 

parameter 

√ √ √ √ √ √ 

Parameters 

Source parameter Transfer size and status Destination parameter 

A Type B Transfer size C Type 

A+1 Leading address B+1 Status flag for RS-485 port C+1 Leading address 

B+2 (max. 2 words) 

Register type Type code Leading address Transfer size 

RW register (RAM) H0003 0 to 255 1 to 256 

D register (RAM) H0004 0 to 4095 1 to 256 

D register (EEPROM) H0020 0 to 2047 1 to 32 (if destination) 

1 to 256 (if source) 

T1S RS-485 port H0030 0 (fixed) 1 to 256 




CPU register ↔ built-in EEPROM 

In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows. 

Example 


D0000 Page 1 

(32 words) 

D0031 

D0032 Page 2 

(32 words) 

D0063 

D2016 Page 64 

(32 words) 

D2047 


• Writing data into the EEPROM is 

available within one page at a 

time. (max. 32 words) 

• For data reading from the 

EEPROM, there is no need to 

consider the pages. 

6F3B0253 

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written 

into the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025). 

D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in 

RAM). D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32) 

and D1004 (16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM). 

Note 

• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the 

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until 

resetting to OFF by user program. 

(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit. 

(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range. 

(3) When the transfer combination is invalid. 

• The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention 

not to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction) 

• Once data writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for 

the duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing. 

• The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program. 

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed 

in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions. 


CPU register ↔ T1S RS-485 port 

 

6F3B0253 


When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code) 

which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU 

registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length 

(in bytes) are stored in the status flag. 

The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete. 

Example 

Source designation Transfer size Destination designation 

D0000 H0030 D0002 00256 (fixed) D0005 H0004 

D0001 00000 D0003 Execution status D0006 00100 

D0004 Message length 

T1S RS-485 port D0100 (CPU register) 

When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after. 

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete 

H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error) 

H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes) 

H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow 

H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code) 

Baudrate Time-out setting 

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds 

2400 bps 15 seconds 



19200 bps 1.5 seconds 

Message length: 0 .............. No receive message 

1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes 

Note 




(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0. 

(2) Transfer size is other than 256. 

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode. 

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1. 




 


6F3B0253 

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from 

start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution 

status is stored in the status flag. 

The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete. 

Example 

Source designation Transfer size Destination designation 

D0010 H00 H04 D0012 00012 D0015 H00 H30 

D0011 00500 D0013 Execution status D0016 00000 

D0500 (CPU register) T1S RS-485 port 

When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of 

D0500 to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. 

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete 

H0001 ... During transmitting the message 

H0002 ... Communication busy 

H0003 ... During the reset operation 

H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code) 

H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table) 

Baudrate Time-out setting 

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds 




19200 bps 1.5 seconds 

Note 




(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0. 

(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256. 

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode. 

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1. 


6F3B0253 


FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer (Inverter connection mode) 

Expression 

Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output 

Function 

This function is provided to control Toshiba Inverters VF-A7/G7/S9 connected on the RS-485 line. 

When the RS-485 port operation mode is set to the Inverter mode (SW56 = 3), the T1-16S can 

perform the following functions for up to 63 Inverters. 

(1) Cyclically scans the Inverters and sends/receives the following data to/from each Inverter. 

• Send to Inverter: Frequency reference write and Operation command write (Run, Stop, etc.) 

• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor 

(2) Cyclically scans the Inverters and receives the following data from each Inverter. 

• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor 

(3) Sends a specified Read command to a specified Inverter and stores the response data. 

(4) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to a specified Inverter. 

(5) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to all the connected inverters as 

broadcast. 





When error is occurred (see Note) ON Set 

Operand 



A Data table √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

B Inverter No. √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 

C RS-485 port √ √ √ √ √ √ 

Parameters 

Data table designation Parameter and status RS-485 port designation 

A Register type code B Inverter number C Fixed to H0030 

A+1 Leading address B+1 Operation mode C+1 Fixed to 0 

B+2 Execution status 

B+3 Communication error code 

B+4 Inverter communication 

B+5 status map 

B+6 (each bit shows each 

B+7 Inverter status) 

Data table designation (A, A+1): 

Register Type code (A) Leading address (A+1) 

RW register H0003 0 to 255 

D register H0004 0 to 4095 




Operation mode designation (B+1): 


6F3B0253 

B+1 Operation mode Description 

0 Data exchange mode Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Control & Monitor) 

(Mode 0) 

(Inverter command: P+FA01&FA00 and R+FD00&FE07) 

1 Monitor mode 

Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Monitor only) 

(Mode 1) 

(Inverter command: R+FD00&FE07) 

2 Read command mode Sends a read command to a specified Inverter 

(Mode 2) 

(Inverter command: R+ User designation) 

3 Write command mode Sends a write command to a specified Inverter 

(Mode 3) 

(Inverter command: P+ User designation) 

4 Broadcast mode Sends a write command to all the connected Inverters as broadcast 

(Mode 4) 

(Inverter command: P+ User designation) 

Inverter number (B): 

For the operation mode 0 and 1: 

It specifies the maximum Inverter number. For example, if it is 5, the T1-16S scans from #0 

through #5 Inverters and repeats. Setting range is 0 to 63. 

For the operation mode 2 and 3: 

It specifies the target Inverter number for sending commands. Setting range is 0 to 63. 

For the operation mode 4: 

This setting is ignored. The broadcast address (HFF) is used as Inverter number. 

Execution status (B+2): 

B+2 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Communication error code (B+3): 

The communication error code responded from the Inverter is shown here. If 2 or more Inverters are error, 

the smallest Inverter number's error is stored. Refer to Inverter's manual for the error code. 

B+3 Meaning 

0 No error (Normal) 

Response time-out (No answer) 

Others Inverter error response (Refer to Inverter's manual) 

Inverter communication status map (B+4 to B+7): 

Shows the scan count. 

(0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 32767 → 0 → 1 ... ) 

Comes 1 when the RS-485 port is busy. (No execution) 

This 4-word table shows the communication status map of each Inverter. (1: Normal / 0: Error or No 

answer) 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

B+4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

B+5 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 

B+6 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 

B+7 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 


Data exchange mode (Mode 0) > 

6F3B0253 


When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 0, the Data exchange mode 

(mode 0) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following commands to the Inverters 

starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats. 

Scan 

#0 Frequency reference write (FA01) 

#0 Operation command write (FA00) 

#1 Frequency reference write (FA01) 

#1 Operation command write (FA00) 

: 

#n Frequency reference write (FA01) 

#n Operation command write (FA00) 

#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00) 

#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07) 



: 

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00) 

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07) 

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B. 

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand 

B+2 to B+7. 

The command data table is specified by the operand A and A+1. 

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the 

response from the Inverter currently communicating. 

Example 

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port 

D1000 4 RW200 5 D1010 H0030 (fixed) 

D1001 2000 RW201 0 (mode 0) D1011 0 (fixed) 

RW202 Execution status 

RW203 Comm error code 

RW204 

RW205 Inverter comms 

RW206 status map 

RW207 

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified. 

• RW200=5 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters. 

• D1000=4 & D1001=2000 ⇒ D2000 is specified as the data table starting address. 




Data table: 

Register Data contents Signal direction 

D2000 #0 Operating frequency ← Read 

D2001 #0 Output terminal status ← Read 

D2002 #0 Frequency reference → Write 

D2003 #0 Operation command → Write 










6F3B0253 

• The data format for the operating frequency and the frequency reference registers are 0.01 Hz units. 

For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000. 

• For the data format of the output terminal status register, refer to the Monitor mode (mode 1). 

• The bit assignment of the operation command register is as follows. For details, refer to your 

Inverter manual. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Example operation: 

Programmed speed selection 

0000 = None 

0001 = Speed 1 

0010 = Speed 2 

: 

1111 = Speed 15 

PI operation (0 = Normal / 1 = Off) 

DC braking (0 = Off / 1 = On) 

Jog operation (0 = off / 1 = On) 

F/R selection (0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse) 

Run/Stop (0 = Stop / 1 = Run) 

Free run (0 = Normal / 1 = Free run) 

Emergency stop (0 = Normal / 1 = EMS) 

Reset command (0 = Normal / 1 = Reset) 

Frequency enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable) 

Command enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable) 

To operate the #0 Inverter at 30 Hz forward rotation, write the value 3000 in D2002 and HC400 in 

D2003. (HC400 = Bits F, E, A are 1, and others are 0) 

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in D2000 

and D2001 respectively. 


Monitor mode (Mode 1) > 

6F3B0253 


When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 1, the Monitor mode (mode 1) is 

selected. 

In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following Read commands to the Inverters starting from #0 

through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats. 

Scan 





: 

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00) 

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07) 

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B. 


B+2 to B+7. 

The monitor data table is specified by the operand A and A+1. 


response from the Inverter currently communicating. 

Example 


D1000 3 RW200 19 D1010 H0030 (fixed) 




RW204 



RW207 


• RW200=19 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 19. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #19 Inverters. 

• D1000=3 & D1001=100 ⇒ RW100 is specified as the data table starting address. 




Data table: 


RW100 #0 Operating frequency ← Read 

RW101 #0 Output terminal status ← Read 

RW102 No use 

RW103 No use 



RW106 No use 

RW107 No use 



RW178 No use 

RW179 No use 


6F3B0253 

• The data format for the operating frequency register is 0.01 Hz units. For example, if it is 60 Hz, the 

corresponding register data is 6000. 

• The bit assignment of the output terminal status register is as follows. For details, refer to your 

Inverter manual. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 


OUT1 (f130) 

OUT2 (f131) 

FL (f132) 

R1 (f133) 

R2 (f134) 

OUT3 (f135) 

OUT4 (f136) 

ALM0 

ALM1 

ALM2 

ALM3 

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in RW100 

and RW101 respectively. 

If the #0 Inverter is operating at 55 Hz, the data 5500 is stored in RW100. If the OUT2 terminal of the 

#0 Inverter is ON, the bit 1 of RW101 (R1011) becomes 1. 


Read command mode (Mode 2) > 

6F3B0253 


When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 2, the Read command mode 

(mode 2) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Read command to the 

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats. 

Repeat 

Sends the specified command to #n Inverter 

Receives the response and stores the data into the register 

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B. 


B+2 to B+7. 

The command setting register and the response data storing register is indirectly specified by 

the operand A and A+1. 


response from the Inverter. 

Example 


D1000 4 RW200 3 D1010 H0030 (fixed) 




RW204 



RW207 


• RW200=3 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 3. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #3 Inverter. 

• D1000=4 & D1001=3000 ⇒ D3000 is specified as the command setting register and D3001 is specified 

as the response data storing register. 

Data table: 


D3000 Command code 

D3001 Response data ← Read 


For example, to read the output current from the #3 Inverter, set the command code HFE03 into 

D3000. Then the response data is stored in D3001. If the response data is 1915, it means 19.15 %. 

For the command code and the data format of the response, refer to your Inverter manual. 




< Write command mode (Mode 3) > 


6F3B0253 

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 3, the Write command mode 

(mode 3) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to the 

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats. 

Repeat 

Sends the specified command with command data to #n Inverter 

Checks the acknowledge 

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B. 


B+2 to B+7. 

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the 

operand A and A+1. 



Example 


D1000 4 RW200 5 D1010 H0030 (fixed) 




RW204 



RW207 


• RW200=5 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #5 Inverter. 

• D1000=4 & D1001=3010 ⇒ D3010 is specified as the command code setting register and D3011 is 

specified as the command data setting register. 

Data table: 



D3011 Command data → Write 


For example, to write the acceleration time parameter (10 seconds) to the #5 Inverter, set the 

command code H0009 into D3010 and the value 100 into D3011. 

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual. 


Broadcast mode (Mode 4) > 

6F3B0253 


When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 4, the Broadcast mode (mode 4) 

is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to all the 

Inverters as broadcast. 

This mode is useful to send Run/Stop command to all the Inverter at the same time. 

Repeat 

Sends the specified command with command data to all Inverters (broadcast) 

Checks the acknowledge from #0 Inverter 

The Inverter number specified by the operand B is ignored. 


B+2 to B+7. (only #0 Inverter responds) 

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the 

operand A and A+1. 



Example 


D1000 4 RW200 (any 0 to 63) D1010 H0030 (fixed) 




RW204 



RW207 


• D1000=4 & D1001=3020 ⇒ D3020 is specified as the command code setting register and D3021 is 

specified as the command data setting register. 

Data table: 



D3021 Command data → Write 


For example, to send the Run forward command to all the Inverters, set the command code HFA00 

into D3020 and the value HC400 into D3021. 

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual. 




< Note > 


6F3B0253 

(1) The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error 

flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by 

user program. 

• The RS-485 port designation is other than H0030 and 0. 

• The Inverter number designation is other than 0 to 63. 

• Operation mode setting for RS-485 port is other than the Inverter connection mode. 

(2) This XFER instruction must be programmed in the Main program. 

(3) During the instruction input is ON, the data contents in the data table specified by A can be changed. 

However, parameters specified by B cannot be changed. 

(4) In the Data exchange mode (mode 0) and the Monitor mode (mode 1), the T1-16S scans from #0 to the 

specified number. Therefore the Inverter number should be consecutive starting with 0. 

If an Inverter is disconnected from the network, the T1-16S checks its existence periodically. When you 

turn off power to an Inverter for maintenance purpose and turn on again, it is recommended to reset the 

instruction input to re-configure the network. 


Section 8 

Special I/O Functions 

8.1 Special I/O function overview, 256 

8.2 Variable input filter constant, 260 

8.3 High speed counter, 261 

8.4 Interrupt input function, 268 

8.5 Analog setting function, 270 

8.6 Pulse output function, 271 

8.7 PWM output function, 273 

6F3B0253 



8. Special I/O Functions 

8.1 Special I/O function overview 

The T1-16S supports the special I/O functions as listed below. 


6F3B0253 

Function name Function summary Remarks 

Variable input filter 

constant 

High 

speed 

counter 

Single phase 

up-counter 

Single phase 

speedcounter 

Quadrature 

bi-pulse 

counter 

Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set 

by user program. The setting range is 0 to 15ms 

(1ms units). Default value is 10ms. This function is 

applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block). 

Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse 

train. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The 

countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel. 

Channel 1 … X000 count input, X002 reset input 

Channel 2 … X001 count input, X003 reset input 

Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling 

time. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000ms 

(10ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available. 

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each 

channel. 

Channel 1 … X000 count input 

Channel 2 … X001 count input 

Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted 

90° each other. Counts up when phase A precedes, 

and counts down when phase B precedes. 

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz. 

Phase A … X000 

Phase B … X001 

Reset …… X002 

Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt 

program when the interrupt input is changed from 

OFF to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input 

are available. 

X002 … Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3) 

Analog setting 

function 

X003 … Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4) 

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted 

into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW 

register. 2 adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. 

V0 … SW30 

V1 … SW31 

Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The 

available pulse rate is 50 to 5000Hz (1Hz units). 

Y020 … CW or Pulse (PLS) 

Y021 … CCW or Direction (DIR) 

PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The 

available ON duty setting is 0 to 100% (1% units). 

Y020 … PWM output 

SW16 setting 

is necessary to 

use this 

function. (Note) 

Only one 

among these 4 

functions can 

be selected. 

SW16 is used 

to select the 

function. 

(Note) 

No function 

selection is 

required. 

Either one 

between these 

2 functions 

can be used. 

SW26 is used 

to select the 

function.(Note) 


Mode setting for the special I/O functions 

6F3B0253 


These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into 

SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for 

the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the 

special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan. 

Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the 

interrupt input functions respectively. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

SW16 0 0 0 0 0 

Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag > 

0: No use 

1: Use 

Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection > 

0: INT 

1: HSC 

Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode > 

00: No use (Reserve) 

01: Rising (OFF to ON) 

10: Falling (ON to OFF) 


Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode > 


01: Rising (OFF to ON) 

10: Falling (ON to OFF) 


Bits A and B < HSC mode > 

00: Single phase up-counter 

01: Single phase speed-counter 

10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter 


Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT > 

00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable 

01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable 

10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable 

11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable 

Bit F < Variable input filter constant > 

0: No use (fixed to 10ms) 

1: Use 




Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function. 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

SW26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 


Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag > 

0: No use 

1: Use 

Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection > 

0: PWM 

1: P-OUT 

Bit 2 < PLS mode > 

0: CW/CCW 

1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) 

P-OUT / PWM operation error flag 

(These are not user setting items) 

Bit D < PWM pulse width error > 

0: Normal 

1: Error 

Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error > 

0: Normal 

1: Error 

Bit F < Frequency setting error > 

0: Normal 

1: Error 

6F3B0253 


6F3B0253 


The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table, 

‘−’ means do not care. 

Variable input filter constant 

SW16 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Use 1 0 − − − − 0 0 − − 0 0 − − − − 

High speed counter 

SW16 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Single phase Channel 1 only − 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

up-counter Channel 2 only − 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Both channels − 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Single phase Channel 1 only − 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

speed-counter Channel 2 only − 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Both channels − 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Quadrature bi-pulse counter − 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Interrupt input function 

SW16 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON) − 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 

Falling (ON to OFF) − 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 

Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON) − 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 

Falling (ON to OFF) − 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising − 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 

1 and 2 No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling − 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising − 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = 

Falling 

− 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 

Pulse output function 

SW26 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

CW/CCW method − − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method − − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 

PWM output function 

SW26 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Use − − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse 

counter. 

(H0803) 

or 




8.2 Variable input filter constant 

Function 


6F3B0253 

The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007 

can be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15ms. The default is 10ms. 

The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after 

the second scan. 

Related registers 

SW16 Function selection. Refer to section 8.1. 

SW17 Input filter constant value 

Operation 

Input signal 

Internal logic 

Scan cycle 

X device 

Sample program 

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

No use (set to 0) 

Setting value 

0 to 15 

T T 

T T 

T: Input filter constant (0 to 15ms) 

This program sets the input filter constant to 3ms. 


8.3 High speed counter 

8.3.1 Single phase up-counter 

Function 

6F3B0253 


When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1. 

When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O 

interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is 

reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON. 

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to 

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. 

The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON. 

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into 

the set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON. 

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data). 

Hardware condition 

Count input (X000 and X001) 

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz) 

Reset input (X002 and X003) 

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more 


SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1. 

Function Register/device Remarks 

Channel 1 Channel 2 

Count input X000 X001 (Note) 

Reset input X002 X003 

Set value SW18 SW20 Data range: H0000 to HFFFF 

Count value SW22 SW23 

Soft-gate S240 S248 Operation is enabled when ON 

Interrupt enable S241 S249 Interrupt is enabled when ON 

Count preset S243 S24B Used to preset the counter value 

Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal 

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused 

channel can be used as normal input devices. 

Interrupt assignment 

Channel 1 … I/O interrupt program #1 

Channel 2 … I/O interrupt program #2 




Operation 

Count input 

Reset input 

Soft-gate 

Count value 

Interrupt 


(H1003) 


Set value 

6F3B0253 

In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase upcounter 

(channel 1 only) is selected. 

When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18). 

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to 

ON to enable the counter operation. 

The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored 

in SW22. 

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of 

D0100. 


8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter 

Function 

6F3B0253 


This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during 

the every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the 

hold value register. 

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is 

OFF, the hold value is cleared to 0. 

The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000ms (10ms units). 

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit). 


Count input (X000 and X001) 





Channel 1 Channel 2 

Count input X000 X001 (Note 2) 

Sampling time SW18 SW20 Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1) 

Hold value SW22 SW23 Data range: H0000 to HFFFF 

Soft-gate S240 S248 Operation is enabled when ON 

Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10ms multiplier) 

Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal 

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused 

channel can be used as normal input devices. 


No interrupt function. 




Operation 

Count input 

Sampling time 

Soft-gate 

Internal 

count value 

Hold value 


(H1403) 


∆T 

a 

∆T 

b 

a 

∆T 

6F3B0253 

In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speedcounter 

(channel 1 only) is selected. 

The sampling time is set as 100ms, because 10 is written in SW18. 

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works. 

The hold value is stored in SW22. 


c 

b 

∆T 

d 

c 

∆T 

e 

d 

e 

∆T

8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter 

Function 

6F3B0253 


This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose 

phases are shifted 90° each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts 

down when phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are 

counted. Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained. 

Phase A 

Phase B 

Up count Down count 

When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt 

program #1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON). 

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to 

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0 

when the reset input comes ON. 

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into 

the comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON. 

The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON. 

The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data). 


Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001) 


Reset input (X002) 

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more 




Phase A X000 

Phase B X001 

Reset input X002 

Comparison value 1 SW19⋅SW18 Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 

Comparison value 2 SW21⋅SW20 

Count value SW23⋅SW22 

Soft-gate S240 Operation is enabled when ON 

Interrupt enable 1 S241 Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON 

Count preset 1 S243 Used to preset the count value 

Interrupt enable 2 S249 Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON 

Count preset 2 S24B Used to preset the count value 





Comparison value 1 … I/O interrupt program #1 

Comparison value 2 … I/O interrupt program #2 

Operation 

Up count 

Down count 

Reset input 

Soft-gate 

Comparison 

value 1 

Count value 

Interrupt 

Comparison 

value 2 


2147483647 

1 

1 

1 

-2147483648 

2 

6F3B0253 



(H0803) 

6F3B0253 


In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse 

counter is selected. 

When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register 

(SW19⋅SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21⋅SW20). 

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the 

interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation. 

The count value is stored in SW23⋅SW22. 

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of 

D0101⋅D0100. 




8.4 Interrupt input function 

Function 

When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to 

OFF), the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately. 

Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be 

selected either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input. 

The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O 

interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2. 


Interrupt input (X002 and X003) 

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more 



Interrupt input 1 X002 

Interrupt input 2 X003 


Interrupt input 1 … I/O interrupt program #3 

Interrupt input 2 … I/O interrupt program #4 

Operation 

Interrupt input 1 

Interrupt input 2 

Interrupt 


3 

4 3 4 

The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs. 

6F3B0253 



Main program 

(H3045) 

I/O interrupt program #3 

I/O interrupt program #4 

Interrupt program A 

Interrupt program B 

6F3B0253 


In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function 

(2 points, rising for both) is selected. 

When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When 

X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed. 

NOTE 

Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the 

corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because 

the interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states. 




8.5 Analog setting function 

Function 

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000) 

and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1) 

The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function 

instructions. 


Function Register Remarks 

Adjuster V0 SW30 Data range: 0 to 1000 

Adjuster V1 SW31 

Operation 

Decrease Increase Decrease Increase 



V0 V1 

SW30 (0 to 1000) SW31 (0 to 1000) 

The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF 

interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0. 

6F3B0253 


8.6 Pulse output function 

Function 

6F3B0253 


This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse 

frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units). 

The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR). 

In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50 

to 5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000). 

In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000), 

and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000). 

< CW/CCW mode > 

< PLS/DIR mode > 

CW 

CCW 

PLS 

DIR 

In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While 

the pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the 

frequency setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency 

setting) cannot be changed when the pulse enable flag is ON. 

This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc. 



Function Register/ Remarks 

CW/CCW PLS/DIR device 

CW pulse PLS Y020 

CCW pulse DIR Y021 

Pulse enable flag S270 Output is enabled when ON 

Frequency setting register SW28 Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000 

Frequency setting error flag S26F ON at error (reset OFF automatically) 

Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and 

50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the 

pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes 

ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting) 




Operation 

Pulse enable 

Frequency setting 

+ 

Frequency 

Pulse output 



- 

100 1000 300 -100 

100Hz 

1KHz 

300Hz 

100Hz 

-1000 

1KHz 

6F3B0253 

In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse 

output function is selected. 

When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by 

D0100. 

If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes 

ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped. 

-300 

300Hz 


8.7 PWM output function 

Function 

6F3B0253 


This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty 

cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units). 

PWM 

ON duty 50% 70% 60% 

T T T T = Pulse cycle 

The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable 

flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting 

value (0 to 100). 

The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before 

turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the 

pulse enable is ON. 

Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100 µs. Therefore, the controllable 

ON duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty 

setting value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON. 

(PWM output operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed) 

Frequency Cycle time Available ON duty 

50 - 100 Hz 20 - 10 ms 0 to 100 % 

200 Hz 5 ms 0, 2 to 98, 100 % 

1000 Hz 1 ms 0, 10 to 90, 100 % 

5000 Hz 200 µs 0, 50, 100 % 



Function Register/ 

device 

Remarks 

PWM pulse Y020 

Pulse enable flag S270 Output is enabled when ON 

Frequency setting register SW28 Data range: 50 to 5000 

ON duty setting register SW29 Data range: 0 to 100 

Pulse width error flag S26D ON at error (reset OFF automatically) 

ON duty setting error flag S26E ON at error (reset OFF automatically) 

Frequency setting error flag S26F ON at error (reset OFF automatically) 

Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the 

frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) 

comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting) 




Operation 

Pulse enable 

ON duty setting 

ON duty 

PWM output 



10 

10% 

20 

20% 

30 

6F3B0253 

In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz 

PWM output function is selected. 

When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by 

D0200. 

If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON 

and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped. 


30% 

70 

70% 

60 

60% 

70 

70%

Section 9 

Maintenance and Checks 

9.1 Precautions during operation, 276 

9.2 Daily checks, 277 

9.3 Periodic checks, 278 

9.4 Maintenance parts, 279 

9.5 Battery, 280 

6F3B0253 



9. Maintenance and Checks 

9.1 Precautions during operation 

When the T1-16S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items. 


6F3B0253 

(1) The programmer cable can be plugged or unplugged while the T1-16S is in 

operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause 

malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity. 

(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause 

damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1-16S owing 

to static electricity, do not touch the cable ends. 

(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1-16S is in operation, even if the terminals 

are not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static 

electricity. 

(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1-16S is in operation. This 

may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity. 

Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used. 

(5) Turn off power when a battery installs and removes. 


9.2 Daily checks 

! CAUTION 

6F3B0253 


1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk 

of electrical shock. 

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is 

emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire 

or electrical shock. 

To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily 

basis. 

Item Check Corrective measures 

Status LEDs PWR Lit when internal 5V is If the LEDs are not normal, see 

(power) normal. 

10. Troubleshooting. 

RUN Lit when operating 

normally. 

FLT (fault) Not lit when operating 

normally. 

Mode control Check that the mode control switch is Turn this switch to R (RUN) side. 

switch 

in R (RUN) side. Normal operation is 

performed when this switch is in R 

(RUN) side. 

Input LEDs Lit when the corresponding input is • Check that the input terminal 

ON. 

screw is not loose. 

• Check that the input terminal 

block is not loose. 

• Check that the input voltage is 

within the specified range. 

Output LEDs Lit when the output is ON and the • Check that the output terminal 

corresponding load should operate. screw is not loose. 

• Check that the output terminal 

block is not loose. 

• Check that the output voltage 

is within the specified range. 




9.3 Periodic checks 

! CAUTION 

Check the T1-16S based on the following items every six months. Also perform 

checks when the operating environment is changed. 


6F3B0253 

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk 

of electrical shock. 




Item Check Criteria 

Power supply Measure the power voltage at the T1- 85 - 132/170 - 264Vac (AC PS) 

16S’s power terminals. 

20.4 - 28.8Vdc (DC PS) 

Check that the terminal screw is not 

loose. 

Not loose 

Check that the power cable is not 

damaged. 

Not damaged 

Installation Check that the unit is installed Not loose, no play 

condition securely. 

Check that the I/O module is inserted 

securely. (if any) 

Not loose, no play 

Check that the expansion rack/unit is 

installed securely. (if any) 


Check that the expansion cable is 

connected securely and the cable is 

not damaged. (if any) 

Not loose, not damaged 

Check that the I/O module on the 

expansion rack is inserted securely. (if 

any) 


Input/output Measure the input/output voltage at The voltage must be within the 

the T1-16S’s terminals. 

specified range. 

Check the input status LEDs. The LED must light normally. 

Check the output status LEDs. The LED must light normally. 

Check that the terminal block is 

installed securely. 


Check that the terminal screw is not Not loose, not contacting the 

loose and the terminal has a sufficient 

distance to the next terminal. 

next terminal 

Check that the each I/O wire is not 

damaged. 

Not damaged 


(Periodic checks - continued) 

6F3B0253 


Item Check Criteria 

Environment Check that the temperature, humidity, 

vibration, dust, etc. are within the 

specified range. 

Programming tool Check that the functions of the 

programming tool are normal. 

Check that the connector and cable 

are not damaged. 

User program Check that the T1-16S program and 

the master program (saved on a floppy 

disk, etc.) are the same. 

9.4 Maintenance parts 

Must be within the range of 

general specification. 

Monitoring and other operations 

are available. 

Not damaged 

No compare error 

To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts. 

Item Quantity Remarks 

T1-16S basic unit 1 Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time 

of the controlled system. 

Programming tool 1 Useful for the troubleshooting procedure. 

Master program As required Saved on a floppy disk, etc. 

Expansion rack or 

unit (if any) 

1 

I/O module 

One of each type 

(if any) 

used 

Fuse for I/O 

One of each type 

module (if any) 

used 

Battery (CR2032) 1 

These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations. 




9.5 Battery 

(1) Install 

(2) Eject 

NOTE 

+ side 


Insert the battery by an angle of 45°. 

(Turn + side into an upside.) 

(1) Push the battery horizontal direction. 

(2) Push from upside and lock. 

6F3B0253 

Push the center of the tab by a finger or a pen. Then 

the battery will be unlocked. 

Remove the battery. 

1. Turn off power when installing or removing the battery for safety. 

2. The battery type is CR2032. Do not use other types of battery. Use of 

another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. 

3. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not 

disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. 


Section 10 

Troubleshooting 

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 282 

10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 288 

6F3B0253 



10. Troubleshooting 

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure 

! CAUTION 


6F3B0253 

1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of 

electrical shock. 






to the T1 and related equipment. 

4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is 

failed. Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for 

unauthorized repairing. 

If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the 

control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try 

to determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system. 

If the problem is found in the T1-16S, check the following points: 

PWR (power) LED Follow the procedure in 

Not lit 10.1.1 Power supply check 

Lit 

RUN LED 

Lit 

Not lit 

Follow the procedure in 

10.1.2 CPU check 

User program 

Normal operation 

Not normal 


10.1.3 Program check 

Input operation 

Normal operation 

Not normal 


10.1.4 Input check 

Output operation Follow the procedure in 

Not normal 10.1.5 Output check 

Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem. 


10.1.1 Power supply check 

6F3B0253 


If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points. 

Check the power connection Connection terminals are correct. 

The terminal screws are not loose. 

The terminal block is installed securely. 

Correct 

Check the power voltage 85 to 132/170 to 264Vac (50/60 Hz) 

at the T1-16S’s terminal or 20.4 to 28.8Vdc (DC power) 

Normal 

Remove the programmer If the PWR LED becomes normal, the 

port connector internal 5Vdc can be shorted in the 

external connections of this port. 

Still unlit 

Remove the 24Vdc service If the PWR LED becomes normal, the 

power terminals if it is used 24Vdc service power can be over load. 

Still unlit 

Remove the I/O modules. If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1-16S 

basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit. 

Lit 

Confirm the internal 5Vdc The 5Vdc capacity for I/O modules is 

current consumption if max. 1.5A. 

I/O module is used. (Refer to section 2.1.) 

Within the limit 

Insert the removed option Replace the faulty I/O module. 

modules one by one to 

pinpoint the faulty card. 




10.1.2 CPU check 

If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points. 

Check the position of the If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the 

mode control switch switch to R (RUN) position. 


6F3B0253 

Check the FLT (fault) LED If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1-16S 

is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error 

message by connecting the 

programming tool. Refer to section 10.2. 

Is the RUN LED blinking ? If it is blinking, the T1-16S is in the HOLD 

mode. Check your program 

whether the HOLD device (S401) is 

not used. 

Connect the programming If the T1-16S stays in HALT mode even 

tool, and check the T1-16S’s when the mode control switch is changed, 

status the switch may be faulty. 

If the communication between the T1-16S 

and the programming tool is not possible, 

the T1-16S may be faulty. 

10.1.3 Program check 

Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation 

does not work as intended. 

(1) Whether duplicated coils are not programmed. 

(2) Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not 

overlapping. 

(3) Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the 

T1-16S’s scan time. 

(4) Whether a register/device, which is used in the main program, is not operated 

erroneously in the interrupt program. 

NOTE 

When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the 

EEPROM write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the 

old program stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your 

program modification will disappear. 


10.1.4 Input check 

6F3B0253 


If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the 

following points: 

Is the input status LED If not, check the input voltage at the 

changed ON/OFF according T1-16S’s input terminals. 

to the corresponding input If the voltage is not normal, check the input 

device operation ? device and the cable. 

If the voltage is normal, the T1-16S’s input 

Yes circuit may be faulty. 

Connect the programming If the monitored X device state is identical 

tool, and monitor the to the state of the input status LED, the 

corresponding X device state cause may lie in the user program or in the 

in RUN mode environment. 

Not normal 

Check whether the X device If it is forced, release the force designation 

is forced or not then execute the EEPROM write 

operation. 

Not forced 

Check whether the I/O If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or 

allocation table is identical to the input circuit may be faulty. 

the actual I/O configuration 

Not identical 

Execute the automatic I/O If it becomes identical, execute the 

allocation, and check whether EEPROM write operation. 

the I/O allocation table is now 

identical to the actual I/O 

configuration 

Still not identical 

Is the allocation mismatch for If so, the card, module or expansion unit 

a specific I/O module? may be faulty. For expansion unit, check 

the expansion cable also. 




10.1.5 Output check 

If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external 

output device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points: 

Is the output status LED 

changed ON/OFF according 

No to the program execution ? 

Yes 


6F3B0253 

Check the voltage between If it is the circuit voltage at the output is 

the output terminal and its ON, or if it is 0V at the output is OFF with 

common terminal. the load ON, the T1-16S’s output circuit 

It should be 0V when the may be faulty. 

output is ON, and it should If it is 0V and the load is also OFF, check 

be the circuit voltage when the output power and the output cable 

the output is OFF. connections. 

Normal 

If it is not normal, check the output cable 

Check the voltage at the load connections. 

If it is normal, check the specification of 

the load, also check environmental factors. 

Check whether the I/O If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or 

allocation table is identical to the output circuit may be faulty. 

the actual I/O configuration 

Not identical 

Execute the automatic I/O If it becomes identical, execute the 

allocation, and check whether EEPROM write operation. 

the I/O allocation table is now 

identical to the actual I/O 

configuration 

Still not identical 

Is the allocation mismatch for If so, the card, module or expansion unit 

a specific I/O module? may be faulty. For expansion unit, check 

the expansion cable also. 


10.1.6 Environmental problem 

6F3B0253 


If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible 

environmental factors. 

(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices: 

The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of 

the problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3. 

(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding 

equipment or high-frequency equipment: 

The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge 

voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause 

the problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system. 

Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some 

cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation. 

(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery: 

The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation 

status of the units and take necessary measures. 

(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced: 

Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module. 

Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature 

is beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed. 




10.2 Self-diagnostic items 


6F3B0253 

If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1-16S CPU, the error 

messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded 

in the T1-16S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation 

is not possible, the T1-16S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR 

mode). 

The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history 

table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered) 

If the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the T1- 

16S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is 

important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to 

display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool. 

(An example of the event history) 

< Event History> 

Date Time Event Count Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 Mode 

1. 98-02-21 16:48:01 I/O no answer 3 #00-04 RUN Down 

2. 98-02-21 15:55:26 System power on 1 INIT. 

3. 98-02-21 12:03:34 System power off 1 RUN 

4. 98-01-15 09:27:12 System power on 1 INIT. 

5. 98-01-14 19:11:43 System power off 1 HALT 

6. 98-01-14 10:39:11 No END/IRET error 3 M-001 H0024 HALT Down 

In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded. 

Each column shows the following information. 

Date: The date when the error has detected (Enhanced model only) 

Time: The time when the error has detected (Enhanced model only) 

Event: Error message 

Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action 

Info n: Related information to the error detected 

Mode: T1-16S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the 

power-up initialization) 

Down: Shows the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected 

If the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not 

accepted. 

In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the 

HALT mode before starting the correction operation. 


6F3B0253 


Error message and related information Special Meaning and countermeasures 

Event Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 device 

Batt voltage drop S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity 

of RAM (back-up area) has been detected. 

If retentive registers are used, these validity 

are not guaranteed. (No error down) 

Boundary error Program Address FUN No. The register of index modification is other 

type - in the 

than RW, T, C and D. (Error down) 

block No. block S064 The register designated by index 

modification has exceeded the allowable 

range. That is, out of RW, T, C and D. 

(No error down) 

Check the value of the index register. 

Clock-calendar error S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal. 

(No error down) 

Set the date and time. 

Duplicate entry No. Program 

type - 

block No. 

EEPROM BCC error Illegal 

BCC 

EEPROM warning Number 

of excess 

writing 

Address 

in the 

block 


Entry No. Multiple SUBR instructions which have the 

same subroutine number are programmed. 

(Error down) 

S004 

S013 

I/O bus error Unit No. Data S005 

S020 

I/O mismatch Unit No. - 

slot No. 

I/O no answer Unit No. - 

slot No. 

I/O parity error Unit No. - 

slot No. 

Illegal I/O reg Unit No. - 

slot No. 

Register 

No. 

Register 

No. 

Register 

No. 

Register 

No. 

Check the program. 

BCC error has been detected in the user 

program of the EEPROM. (Error down) 

Reload the program and execute EEPROM 

write operation again. 

S007 The number of times of writing into 

EEPROM has exceeded the life (100,000 

times). (No error down) 

Replace the unit because the data reliability 

S005 

S021 

S005 

S022 

S005 

S023 

S005 

S021 

of the EEPROM will decrease. 

An abnormality has been detected in I/O 

bus checking. (Error down) 

Check the expansion cable connection and 

I/O module mounting status. 

The I/O allocation information and the 

actual I/O configuration are not identical. 

(Error down) 

Check the I/O allocation and the I/O module 

mounting status. 

No response from the T2 I/O module has 

been received. (Error down) 

Check the I/O allocation, the expansion 

cable connection and the T2 I/O module 

mounting status. 

I/O bus parity error has been detected in 

data read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error 

down) 

Check the expansion cable connection and 

the T2 I/O module mounting status. 

The allocated I/O register address exceeds 

the limit, 32 words. (Error down) 

Check the I/O allocation. 





6F3B0253 



Illegal inst Program Address 

S006 An illegal instruction has been detected in 

type - in the 

S030 the program. (Error down) 

block No. block 

S060 Reload the program and execute EEPROM 


Illegal sys intrpt Interrupt Interrupt 

Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No 

address 1 address 2 

error down) 

If the error occurs frequently, replace the 

unit. 

Invalid Fun inst Program Address Fun No. A function instruction which is not supported 

type - in the 

by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down) 


Correct the program. 

Invalid program Program 

A basic ladder instruction which is not 

type - 

supported by the T1-16S is programmed. 

block No. 

(Error down) 


SUBR instruction is not programmed before 

RET instruction. (Error down) 


An abnormality is detected in the program 

management information. (Error down) 

Reload the program and execute EEPROM 


Loop nesting error Program Address 

A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside 

type - in the 

other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down) 



Memory full The program exceeds the executable 

memory capacity. (Error down) 

Reduce the program steps. 

No END/IRET error Program Address 

The END instruction is not programmed in 

type - in the 

the main program or in the sub-program. 


(Error down) 


The IRET instruction is not programmed in 

the interrupt program. (Error down) 


No RET error Program Address Sub-r No. The RET instruction is not programmed in 

type - in the 

the subroutine program. (Error down) 



No sub-r entry Program Address Sub-r No. The subroutine corresponding to CALL 

type - in the 

instruction is not programmed. (Error down) 




6F3B0253 




Operand error Program Address 

A register/device which is not supported by 

type - in the 

the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down) 



The timer or counter register is duplicated in 

the program. (Error down) 


The subroutine number programmed with 

CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the 

range. (Error down) 

0 to 255 


Index modification is programmed for 

instructions in which the index modification 

is not allowed. (Error down) 


Pair inst error Program Address 

The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR, 

type - in the 

JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error 


down) 


A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other 

MCS-MCR segment. (Error down ) 


A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other 

JCS-JCR segment. (Error down ) 


Peripheral LSI err Error 

S004 CPU hardware error has been detected in 

code 

S016 the power-up initialization. (Error down and 

programming tool cannot be connected) 

Replace the unit if the error remains after 

power OFF and ON again. 

Program BCC error Illegal 

S006 BCC error has been detected in the user 

BCC 

S030 program in the RAM. (Error down) 

If the error remains after power OFF and 

ON again, reload the program and execute 

EEPROM write operation. 

RAM check error Error Error data Test data S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has 

address 

S012 detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error 

down) 



Scan time over Scan time S006 The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error 

S031 down) 

Correct the program to reduce the scan time 

or use WDT instruction to extend the check 

time. 





6F3B0253 



Sys RAM check err Error Error data Test data S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has 

address 

S011 detected by system RAM read/write 

checking. (Error down and programming 

tool cannot be connected) 



Sys ROM BCC error Illegal 

S004 BCC error has been detected in the system 

BCC 

S010 program in the ROM. (Error down and 

programming tool cannot be connected) 



System power off Power OFF (no error) 

System power on Power ON (no error) 

Sub-r nesting err Program Address Sub-r No. The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3 

type - in the 

levels. 


(Error down) 


WD timer error Address 1 Address 2 S004 The watchdog timer error has occurred. 

S01F (Error down) 

If the error occurs frequently, replace the 

unit. 


Appendix 

A.1 List of models and types, 294 

A.2 Instruction index, 295 

6F3B0253 



Appendix 

A.1 List of models and types 

• Basic unit 


6F3B0253 

Model Power supply Input type RTC/RS-485 Type code Part number 

T1-16S 100 – 240Vac 24Vdc 

Yes T1-MDR16SS TDR116S6S 

No T1-MDR16SC TDR116S6C 

24Vdc 

Yes T1-MDR16SSD TDR116S3S 

No T1-MDR16SCD TDR116S3C 

• I/O module 

Description Type code Part number 

16 points 24Vdc input DI116M TDI116M∗S 

16 points 24Vdc output DO116M TDO116M∗S 

8 points 24Vdc input and 8 points 24Vdc output DD116M TDD116M∗S 

8 points relay output RO108M TRO108M∗S 

1 channel analog input, 0 – 5V/0 - 20mA AD121M TAD121M∗S 

1 channel analog input, ±10V AD131M TAD131M∗S 

1 channel analog output, 0 – 20mA DA121M TDA121M∗S 

1 channel analog output, ±10V DA131M TDA131M∗S 

1 channel thermo couple input, K/E/J TC111M TTC111M∗S 

TOSLINE-F10 remote station FR112M TFR112M∗S 

• Peripherals 


Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S) HP911A THP911A∗S 

T-PDS software (Windows version) T-PDS Windows TMW33E2SS 

Program storage module RM102 TRM102∗∗S 

Multi-drop adapter for computer link CU111 TCU111∗∗S 

• Cable and others 


T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length CJ105 TCJ105∗CS 

HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts) CJ102 TCJ102∗CS 

RS-232C connector for computer link 

(with 2 m cable) 

PT16S TPT16S∗AS 

I/O module I/O connector for 

PT15S TPT15S∗AS 

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, soldering type 

I/O module I/O connector for 

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, flat cable type 

PT15F TPT15F∗AS 


Appendix 

A.2 Instruction index 

• Instruction name 

1 bit rotate left 173 Exclusive OR 158 

1 bit rotate right 172 Expanded data transfer 241 

1 bit shift left 165 Flip-flop 215 

1 bit shift right 164 FOR 205 

2’s complement 232 Forced coil 122 

7-segment decode 234 Function generator 229 

Absolute value 231 Greater than 178 

Addition 143 Greater than or equal 179 

Addition with carry 149 Hex to ASCII conversion 161 

AND 156 Increment 154 

ASCII conversion 236 Interrupt return 210 

ASCII to Hex conversion 162 Invert coil 124 

Average value 228 Invert transfer 138 

BCD conversion 238 Inverter 123 

Bi-directional shift register 170 Jump control reset 134 

Binary conversion 237 Jump control set 134 

Bit count 202 Less than 182 

Bit test 163 Less than or equal 183 

Calendar operation 218 Lower limit 225 

Coil 121 Master control reset 133 

Counter 132 Master control set 133 

Data exchange 139 Maximum value 226 

Data transfer 136 Minimum value 227 

Decode 201 Moving average 159 

Decrement 155 Multiplexer 176 

Demultiplexer 177 Multiplication 145 

Device/register reset 197 n bit rotate left 175 

Device/register set 196 n bit rotate right 174 

Digital filter 160 n bit shift left 167 

Direct I/O 239 n bit shift right 166 

Disable interrupt 209 NC contact 118 

Division 146 Negative pulse coil 128 

Double-word 2’s complement 233 Negative pulse contact 126 

Double-word addition 147 NEXT 206 

Double-word data transfer 137 NO contact 117 

Double-word equal 286 Not equal 181 

Double-word greater than 284 OFF delay timer 130 

Double-word greater than or equal 285 ON delay timer 129 

Double-word less than 288 OR 157 

Double-word less than or equal 289 Positive pulse coil 127 

Double-word not equal 287 Positive pulse contact 125 

Double-word subtraction 148 Pre-derivative real PID 219 

Enable interrupt 208 Reset carry 199 

Encode 200 Set calendar 217 

End 135 Set carry 198 

Equal 180 Shift register 168 

6F3B0253 



Single shot timer 131 

Special module data read 245 

Special module data write 247 

Step sequence initialize 212 

Step sequence input 213 

Step sequence output 214 

Subroutine call 203 

Subroutine entry 207 

Subroutine return 204 

Subtraction 144 

Subtraction with carry 150 

Table initialize 140 

Table invert transfer 142 

Table transfer 141 

Transitional contact (falling) 120 

Transitional contact (rising) 119 

Unsigned division 152 

Unsigned double/single division 153 

Unsigned equal 192 

Unsigned greater than 190 

Unsigned greater than or equal 191 

Unsigned less than 194 

Unsigned less than or equal 195 

Unsigned multiplication 151 

Unsigned not equal 193 

Up-down counter 216 

Upper limit 224 

Watchdog timer reset 211 


6F3B0253 

Appendix 


Appendix 

• Instruction symbol 

∗ 145 FG 229 U/D 216 

+ 143 FOR 205 U< 194 

+1 154 HTOA 161 U 190 

-C 150 JCS 134 U>= 191 

/ 146 LL 225 UL 224 

< 182 MAVE 159 WDT 211 

178 MIN 227 

>= 179 MOV 136 

7SEG 234 MPX 176 

ABS 231 NEG 232 

AND 156 NEXT 206 

ASC 236 NOT 138 

ATOH 162 OR 157 

AVE 228 PID3 219 

BC 202 READ 245 

BCD 238 RET 204 

BIN 237 RST 197 

CALL 203 RSTC 199 

CLDN 217 RTL 175 

CLDS 218 RTL1 173 

CNT 132 RTR 174 

D+ 147 RTR1 172 

D- 148 SET 196 

D< 188 SETC 198 

D 184 SHR1 164 

D>= 185 SR 168 

DEC 201 SS 131 

DFL 160 STIN 213 

DI 209 STIZ 212 

DIV 153 STOT 214 

DMOV 137 SUBR 207 

DNEG 233 TEST 163 

DPX 177 TINZ 140 

DSR 170 TMOV 141 

EI 208 TNOT 142 

ENC 200 TOF 130 

END 135 TON 129 

EOR 158 U∗ 151 

F/F 215 U/ 152 

6F3B0253

Toshiba PROSEC T1-16S PLC User's Manual - CTi Automation

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?